Skip to main content

Full text of "Being and becoming; a book of lessons in the science of mind showing how to find the personal spirit"

See other formats


■ 


Hi 


H  m 


JkLL 


\\o\^t^    p^wick    Ud&x 


1 


BEING  AND  BECOMING 


BOOKS  BY 

Fenwicke  Lindsay  Holmes 

"The  Law  of  Mind  in  Action" 
"How  to   Develop    Faith   That 

Heals" 
"Songs  of  the  Silence" 
"The   Unfailing  Formula" 
and  other  works. 
Associate  founder  of  the  South- 
ern California  Metaphysical 
Institute 


BOOKS  BY 

Ernest  Shurtleff  Holmes 

"Creative  Mind" 

"Creative   Mind  and   Success" 


FOREWORD. 

THIS  book  is  written  to  show  how  we  know 
that  there  is  a  universal  intelligence ;  how  that 
intelligence  or  being  becomes  manifest,  or  the 
passing  of  spirit  into  form;  the  method  by  which 
we  can  control  the  form  it  shall  take  for  us  as  in- 
dividuals ;  the  way  in  which  we  can  harness  cosmic 
forces ;  and  above  all  it  is  written  to  make  plain  the 
personal  relation  of  our  own  self  with  the  Greater 
Self  whose  life  we  share. 

The  highest  purpose  of  this  science  of  thinking 
is  to  develop  a  conscious  feeling  of  our  oneness 
with  Spirit.  By  Spirit  we  mean  the  absolute  of 
Life,  Love  and  Wisdom.  "Thou  hast  made  us  for 
Thyself;  and  our  hearts  are  restless  'til  they  rest 
in  Thee."  This,  therefore,  is  the  Book  of  Love 
and  explains  fully  the  nature  of  the  feeling-life. 

Without  detracting  from  the  essential  teaching 
of  the  new  science,  that  man  is  endowed  with  per- 
fect freedom  and  can  make  his  life  what  he  will  by 
his  conscious  choices,  I  have  shown  here  how  we 
may  still  keep  the  delightful  fellowship  of  the  Per- 
sonal Spirit  and  the  sense  of  a  Presence  that  guides 
us  in  all  the  affairs  of  life. 

Fenwicke  Lindsay  Holmes. 

Los  Angeles,  Calif. 
Feb.  6,  ip20. 


/ 


CONTENTS 

PART  ONE 

BEING  AS  THE  IMPERSONAL  LIFE 

chapter  Students*  Outline  page 

I.    Being  or  the  Changeless  Life      ....      3 

A  study  of  the  universe  reveals  the  fact  that  back 
of  every  visible  thing  is  the  invisible  force  or  en- 
ergy that  sustains  it  in  form.  What  this  energy  is 
in  itself,  we  do  not  know;  but  as  it  acts  with  in- 
telligence and  betrays  the  fact  that  the  base  of  all 
things  is  one,  we  call  it  "That-Which-Is,"  that  is, 
Being  or  Mind. 

II.    Becoming  or  the  Changing  Form     ...     10 

Being  is  always  seeking  expression;  and  as  it  is 
Mind,  its  mode  is  thought  and  feeling  and  its  man- 
ifestation idea  and  form.  Creation  is  therefore  the 
form  which  God's  thought  is  taking;  and  the  proc- 
ess  goes  on  forever,  so  that  if  we  once  place  our- 
selves in  the  current  of  divine  consciousness  we  can 
be  prospered  and  healed  without  personal  struggle. 

\ 

III.  Being  Is  Becoming  Through  Us        ...     14 

Being  thus  acts  through  us;  and  the  attitude  we  as- 
sume toward  it  determines  the  character  of  its  man- 
ifestation for  us.  The  best  results  are  therefore  se- 
cured by  relying  upon  the  power  within,  while  at 
the  same  time^  making  sure  that  we  choose  what 
we  most  want  it  to  become. 

IV.  The    Mental    Universe  —  Why   We    Call 
Things  Ideas ' 20 

We  see  from  the  foregoing  that  Life  or  Being  is 
intelligence;  and  since  I  know  that  I,  too,  am  being 
and  a  self,  I  can  but  conclude  that  all  things  which 
have  intelligence  may  also  be  selves.  Trees,  rocks, 
etc.,  may^  be  thought  of  as  Being  expressing  itself 
through  its  idea.  Thus  all  nature  is  directly  re- 
lated to  us  and  cannot  have  its  fullest  meaning 
without  the  cognizing  mind.  _  Color,  odor,  and  such 
qualities  exist  not  so  much  in  the  thing  as  in  our 
idea  about  the  thing.  This  shows  the  unity  of  all, 
since  each  thing  depends  on  every  other  thing  and 
self  for  its  own  complete  manifestation, 
vii 


viii  Contents 


chapter  Students'  Outline  page 

V.    If  "Things  Are  Ideas,"  What  Is  "Real"?    .    27 

The  question  naturally  arises:  If  things  are  ideas, 
do  they  not  exist  entirely  in  the  mind  of  the  indi- 
vidual? Do  I  ever  "see"  anything?  The  answer  is 
that  we  each  do  see  things  in  a  different  way,  yet 
there  is  with  each  thing  a  certain  fixity  of  idea 
which  is  common  to  all  and  which  awakens  the  at- 
tention of  all  to  the  presence  of  the  thing.  This 
common  factor  is  vibration.  But  vibration  is  an 
idea*  for  it  is  thought.  Vibration  ancTtnoughf  areime, 
simply  Hie  functioning  of  mind.  Things  can  exist 
apart  from  my  own  thought  for  they  are  thoughts 
of  God.  My  consciousness  is  aroused  by  the  pres- 
ence of  thought  or  vibration  which  exists  as  a  . 
"real."  As  God  may  "see"  things  clothed  in  color 
even  as  we  see  them,  the  idea  may  conceivably  be 
complete  without  my  mind  at  all.  The  theory  of  , 
illusions  is  necessarily,  therefore,  a  violation  of 
philosophic  as  well  as  common  sense.  Since  things 
are  thoughts,  our  own  superior  understanding  en- 
ables each  of  us  to  control  his  life  through  his 
thoughts  and  ideas. 

VI.    Personal  and  Impersonal  Mind    ....    36 

As  each  idea  or  thing  is  a  definite  thought  and  is 
sustained  by  the  presence  of  Being  or  Intelligence, 
Being  is,  as  we  have  seen,  a  self  to  that  extent. 
This  reveals  the  great  personalness  of  the  universe. 
Further  study  shows  the  fact  that  Being  acts  both 
personally  and  impersonally.  This  is  well  illustrated 
in  the  case  of  man's  own  mind.  It  is  two-fold: 
the  objective  or  personal  mind  chooses,  wills,  and 
initiates  action  through  the  selection  and  formation 
of  ideas;  the  subjective  or  impersonal  mind  is  the 
storehouse  of  memory,  the  foundation  of  the  sensa- 
tional life  and  the  soil  in  which  all  thoughts  grow 
into  form  and  expression.  It  is  the  creative  life 
within  each  of  us.^  It  does  not  originate  ideas,  but 
takes  the  model  given  it  by  the  personal  mind  and 
creates  accordingly.  The  Universal  Mind  can  be 
shown  to  have  the  same  characteristics;  in  the 
larger  aspects  it  is  a  Self,  for  it  chooses  the  lines 
of  its  activity;  but  in  the  affairs  that  concern  us 
as  individuals  it  acts  as  law  or  impersonally.  Thus, 
through  our  unity  with  it,  we  can  choose  what  it 
shall  do  for  us;  and  it  becomes  manifest  as  that 
thing  which  we  think. 

VII.    The  Part  "I"  Play  in  Cosmic  Mind      .     .51 

Man  individualizes  God.  There  is  but  One  Mind; 
and  as  "I  am,"  I  must  be  related  to  it  and  share 
its  resources  and  power.  Then  my  choices  become 
the  choices  or  ideas  of  the  impersonal  mind;  and  it 
creates  accordingly.    This  explains  evil  as  well  as 


Contents  ix 


chapter  Students'  Outline  page 

good,  since  Being  becomes  manifest  either  for  good 
or  ill  according  to  the  idea  or  thought  which  forms 
the  mold  for  its  expression.  This  truth  does  away 
with  any  concept  of  a  dual  mind. 

VIII.    Man's  Greater  Body  and  the  Feeling-life    57 

Being  is  not  only  a  thinker  but  also  a  lover.  While 
feeling  is  indeed  a  fine  form  of  thinking,  yet  we 
may  speak  of  Being  as  the  Feeling-life.  Each  of 
us  has  a  well-developed  feeling  nature  which  we 
derive  from  Original  Feeling  or  God.  This  feeling- 
life  operates  not  only  within  the  area  of  what  we 
commonly  know  as  the  physical  body,  but  also 
functions  through  an  area  of  fine  vibration  all 
about  us  which  is  so  sensitive  that  it  takes  the  im- 
pression even  of  thought  forces.  We  are  thus  con- 
stantly directly  in  contact  with  others  through  the 
very  atmosphere.  This  is  illustrated  in  the  aura 
and  in  the  odic  fluid.  Through  both  the  greater 
body  and  the  lesser,  there  run  the  finer  feeling 
forces  which  lie  between  man's  conscious  thought 
and  his  body.  The  body  is  profoundly  affected  by 
whatever  affects  the  feeling-life;  and  as  the  latter 
is  impersonal,  every  thought  and  feeling  we  expe- 
rience is  registered  directly  on  the  body  and  affairs. 
Thus  our  bodies  are  subject  to  all  mental  influences 
that  come  to  us;  and  unless  we  protect  ourselves, 
we  may  even  suffer  from  malicious  influences.  The 
law  works  in  either  direction.  We  are  therefore 
told  in  this  chapter  how  to  control  life  through  the 
control  of  thoughts  and  emotions. 

IX.    The  Emotional  Self  and  the  Causes  of 

Disease 68 

It  has  become  plain,  then,  that  through  the  avenue 
of  thought  and  feeling  man  controls  his  destiny  or 
is  subject  to  control  from  without  if  he  allows  it. 
Disease  can  be  directly  traced  to  unguarded  emo- 
tional life.  The  fatal  effect  of  harsh  and  careless 
words  is  thus  revealed  especially  in  the  life  of 
women.  Calamity-howlers  should  be  fined  or  im- 
prisoned as  awakening  the  fear-thought  which  pro- 
duces the  disease  or  disaster.  Yet  we  must  never 
blame  our  troubles  on  others,  as  the  power  is  given 
us  to  control  these  things  by  conscious  choices. 
We  must  refrain  from  emotions  that  poison  the 
blood,  etc.  We  therefore  study  what  attitude  of 
mind  to  assume  in  the  case  of  psychic  disease  and 
the  subtle  pains'  of  abused  love  nature.  Thus  man 
is  shown  his  power  to  control  life  and  happiness  by 
the  thoughts  he  thinks  and  the  emotions  he  enter- 
tains. He  can  heal  himself  of  every  disease  through 
these  laws. 


x  Contents 

chapter                   Students'  Outline  page 

X.    Choosing  What  We  Want 80 

Instruction  is  now  given  as  to  the  direct  way  in 
which  choice  governs  our  life  and  destiny  and  how 
we  may  use  impersonal  creative  mind  in  securing 
the  objects  of  our  desire.  Every  thought,  word  and 
idea  is  found  to  be  matched  by  reality;  and  life  is 
a  magic  mirror  which  gives  to  us  created  what  we 
present  to  it  in  concept  and  ideal. 

XL    Picturing  Our  Good 87 

We  are  therefore  taught  to  give  conscious  thought 
to  our  ideas  and  deliberately  to  brood  upon  those 
things  which  we  wish  to  have  come  forth.  >  One  of 
the  best  ways  to  do  this  is  to  picture  in  imagina- 
tion just  what  we  would  like  to  have  come  forth 
into  the  world  of  reality.  This  is  the  way  in  which 
Cosmic  Mind  creates;  and  we  cannot  improve  on 
the  method.  Whatever  God  thinks,  becomes;  and, 
since  man  uses  the  same  power  he  can  pass  the 
substance  of  spirit  out  into  any  form  by  imaging 
that  form  and  then  expecting  it  to  appear.  This  re- 
lieves us  from  all  necessity  of  struggle.  It  is  not 
will,  but  faith.  Thus  in  "ideation,"  rather  than 
"will,"  do  we  find  the  secret  of  life's  control.  Yet 
this  throws  vast  responsibility  on  the  individual, 
for  he  must  do  the  choosing.  He  may  make  mis- 
takes; but  he  will  learn  from  their  consequences; 
and  ultimately  he  will  turn  to  Spirit  for  guidance 
in  his  choices,  by  intuition.  (See  XX.)  Whatever 
comes,  therefore,  must  be  recognized  as  real, 
whether  good  or  bad;  and  the  effect  cannot  be  re- 
moved by  simply  denying  that  it  exists.  It  must  be 
removed  by  changing  the  cause  or  choice.  "Denials" 
do  not  create;  but  we  are  after  a  new  creation,  so 
we  affirm  or  rather  select  the  things  we  do  want. 
Thus  the  determining  factors  of  life  are  choice  and 
idea. 

XII.    A  Definite  Method  for'  Realization  ^  .     .    98 

\  Man  cannot  change  the  law  of  cosmic  forces.'  He 
lives  in  a  world  of  constant  movement;  and  cata- 
clysms are  bound  to  occur  in  the  process  of  evolu- 
tion or  unfoldment.  But  his  escape  is  through  that 
divine  guidance  which  will  free  him  personally 
from  peril.  To  have  a  well-regulated  and  happy 
life,  therefore,  we  must  learn  how  to  turn  to 
Divine  Mind  and  bring  forth  the  good  that  we 
desire.  Thus  we  realize  the  law  of  life;  and  then,* 
without  any  sense  of  struggle,  we  turn  to  the  Law 
and  ask  for  what  we  want.  The  process  is  simple: 
selection,  anticipation.  One  can  get  good  results 
by  lying  down;  and,  after  centering  the  thought,! 
one  simply  dwells  on  the  fact  that  spirit  is  now, 
passing  through  into  expression;  being  is  in  us  be- 
coming.   The  realization  of  spirit,  myself,  as  spirits 


Contents  "xi". 


chapter  Students'  Outline x  page' 

my  body,  my  conditions,  my  world,  this  is  the 
whole  aim  of  mental  science.  ^When  this  is  accom- 
plished, our  "demonstration"  is  made. 

XIII.  Using  the  Law  of  Impersonal  Mind  in  the 
Case  of  Prosperity 103 

As  for  health  and  happiness,  so  for  prosperity:  we 
realize  that  the  work  that  is  to  be  done  is  not  per- 
formed by  us,  but  by  cosmic  mind  and  forces;  we 
are  one  with  the  Universal  Impersonal  Creative 
Mind;  and  It  does  the  work  for  us.  So  I  must 
first  establish  my  sense  of  union  with  it;  I  must 
know  that  I  am  speaking  into  the  only  mind  there 
is  and  backed  by  the  only  power  there  is.  My  men- 
tal equivalent  is  my  thought  of  perfect  faith:  it 
will  be  matched  by  the  perfect  reality  from  the 
Father.  Thus  to  secure  a  position,  to  sell  a  house, 
to  obtain  a  home,  to  secure  money,  one  acts  in  the 
silence  of  thought,  declares  his  faith  and  his  choice 
and  BELIEVES. 

XIV.  Summary  of  Law  of  Impersonal  Mind     .  Ill 

The  law  by  which  spirit  passes  into  form  is  like  the 
law  of  light  in  a  stereopticon.  The  light  is  the 
spirit;  the  slide  is  the  thought;  the  lens  is  the 
will;  the  screen-picture  is  the  form.  Light  is  there- 
fore both  energy  and  substance.  Spirit  is  always 
spirit  no  matter  what  form  It  may  assume.    All  we 

have  to  do  is  to  propose  to   ourselves  that  Divine^ . 

Mind  shall  work  out  our  problem,  and  then  leave !*""" 
the  issue^  with  God.  Nor'must  we  think  that  the 
moment  in  the  silence  is  the  determining  factor: 
it  is  the  constant  attitude  of  expectancy  that  rules 
our  creations.  Nor  must  we  always  approach  Mind 
for  things.  This  deadens  the  spiritual  nature:  God 
is  greater  than  an  impersonal,  creative  force. 
There  cannot  be  an  impersonal  life  without  a  per- 
sonal. The  highest  instincts  of  life  will  never  be 
satisfied  without  the  discovery  of  the  Personal 
Spirit. 

PART  TWO 

BEING  AS  THE  PERSONAL  SPIRIT 
XV.    The  God  Who  Hears  Us .119 

Every  one  experiences  God  as  personal.  Yet  God's 
personal  nature  is  not  entirely  like  our  own.  In 
brief,  He  has  personality  as  we  have  it,  with  the 
exception  that^  no  quality  should  be  attributed  to 
Him  that  denies  His  absoluteness.  His  freedom  is 
perfect;  His  knowledge  is  complete.  We  often  are 
entangled  in  the  toils  of  our  mistakes;   He  never, 


xu 


Contents 


chapter  Students'  Outline  page 

We  suffer  from  pain  and  hardship  through  the  in- 
completeness of  our  knowledge;  He  never.  g  We 
have  a  sense  of  time  and  space;  these  are  not  ideas 
with  God.  Yet,  with  us,  God  shares  the  power  to 
think,  will,  and  feel.  He  is  therefore  personal  in 
three  ways:  first,  He  is  an  Absolute  self,  for  He 
planned,  initiated,  and  chose  the  area  of  all  the 
worlds  in  space.  These  are  qualities  of  personality. 
Impersonal  mind  cannot  work  without  a  plan.  As 
Personal,  God  makes  the  plan;  He  purposes.  The 
pronoun  "He"  must  be  thought  of  as  indicating 
person,  not  gender.  Yet  so  vast  is  the  plan  of  the 
Cosmic  Mind  that,  so  far  as  we  are  concerned,  He 
works  by  law,  and  never  interferes  with  our 
choices.  Nothing  in  the  personality  of  God  shotild 
ever  be  construed  as  denying  personal  choice  to  the 
individual.  Second,  in  "God  are  all  the  personal 
qualities,  which  Troward  calls  the  "personalness," 
from  which  the  individual  derives  his  personal  na- 
ture. Third,  He  is  personal  in  us,  as  each  indi- 
vidual is  God  individualized.  There  is  but  one  sub- 
stance and  one  source  of  all  minds.  We  are  pur- 
poses of  Being, — His  self-expression  through  love. 


XVI.    The  God  Who  Loves  Us 


129 


Since  God  seeks  self-expression  in  love  through  us, 
He  becomes  the  support  of  the  highest  efforts  and 
reaches  of  our  ambition  to  attain  perfection  and 
happiness.  The  height  of  attainment  is  therefore  a 
sense  of  conscious  union  with  Him  while  we  pur- 
sue the  pathway  of  self-unfoldment  and  expression. 
To  secure  this  sense  of  union,  we  have  but  to  let 
or  allow  spirit  to  flow  through  us  as  love. 


XVII.    The  God  Who  Heals  Us 


135 


XVIII. 


Love  thus  becomes  the  great  healing  power  since 
it  is  harmonious  life  and  wholeness,  for  love  is  the 
union  of  kindred  things.  We  are  therefore  shown 
cases  of  healing  through  the  love-consciousness 
which  is  the  greatest  healing  power.  Wholeness  is 
substituted  for  unwholesomeness.  'Feelings  and 
emotions  are  shown  directly  to  affect  the  health, 
because  they  are  the  medium  through  which  Love 
or  Spirit  passes  into  expression.  Yet  love  is  not 
to  be  sought  in  order  to  obtain  things  but  rather 
for  its  own  sake.  Disinterested  affection  is  divine; 
life  is  fully  realized  only  as  we  love.  "Love  is  the 
fulfilling  of  the  law.]'  The  question  arises,— How 
may  we  cooperate  with  God  in  fulfilling  His  own 
purpose,  self-expression  in  love? 

The  Mystic  Union,  or  How  to  Realize  the 
Presence 141 

v  Man  is  born  for  love,  for  He  is  a  purpose  of  God 
in  self-realization.    He  must  therefore  find  God  in 


Contents  xiii 


chapter  Students'  Outline  page 

order  to  be  complete.  But  he  can  reach  God  only 
through  his  own  soul.  "It  is  the  flight  of  the 
alone  to  the  Alone."  Man  moves  to  God,  however, 
only  on  his  own  choice.  He  effects  the  union  from 
within.  Various  steps  mark  his  progress.  First,  he 
must  learn  to  concentrate  on  the  one  purpose  of 
approaching  God.  He  must  center  his  thought. 
Union  is  obtained  only  by  determined  desire.  Sec- 
ond, through  this  control  of  thought  he  enters  the 
quiet  of  the  soul.  From  here,  he  presses  on  into 
direct  contemplation  of  God  as  All.  This  is  a  vast 
experience  and  worth  every  effort.  Joy  and  peace 
and  ecstasy  are  its  reward. 

XIX.    The    Mystic    Union  — The    Soul's    Dark 

Hour — The  Light  Eternal 151 

Not  content  with  contemplation  of  the  ineffable 
sweetness  of  the  All-Love,  the  spirit  yearns  for 
closer  contacts  or  direct  union.  In  his  search,  man 
often  loses  his  bearings  and  plunges  into  a  mental 
chaos.  This  is  the  soul's  dark  hour;  but,  with  the 
determined  mind,  it  presages  the  dawn.  The  final 
step  in  the  mystic  union  is  the  "unified  life"  or  the 
"deified  life"  of  which  Jesus  spoke,  "I  and  the 
Father  are  one."    This  is  the  final  goal  and  brings  L 

to  the  soul  the  true  consciousness  of  being.  The 
great  circle  is  thus  complete,  when  man  not  only 
intellectually  accepts  the  nature  of  all  as  being  but 
perceives  or  realizes  Being  Itself.  This  is,  then, 
the  true  basis  of  all  becoming. 

XX.  Intuition,  or  the  Higher  Wisdom  of  the 
Unified  Life 157 

We  have  now  reached  a  state  of  consciousness 
where  the  doors  of  the  Divine  Wisdom  can  be 
thrown  open  to  us;  and  we  are  able  by  intuition  to 
go  in  and  discover  the  pathways  we  should  take  to 
secure  all  good  and  to  avoid  all  ill.  We  thus  learn 
how  to  escape  wrong  choices  and  to  be  free  from 
the  lash  of  the  law  through  Karma.  The  purpose 
of  living  if  not  that  we  may  learn  what  not  to  do, 
but  rather  what  to  do.  Thus  experience  is  not  the 
best  teacher.  The  intuitions  occupy  the  first  place. 
Intuition  and  ideation  go  together,  for  by  our  intui- 
tion we  know  what  is  the  best  idea  to  select.  This 
is  illustrated  in  the  case  of  the  treatment  of  dis- 
ease. Identity  with  Spirit  in  consciousness  will  se- 
cure  perfect  results. 

XXI.  Does  Death  End  the  Process  by  Which 
Being  Becomes? 165 

Creation  is  an  endless  process  and  therefore  the 
passing  of  being  into  expression  will  never  be  com- 


xiv  Contents 

chapter  Students'  Outline  page 

pleted.  We  shall  always  be  on  the  pathway  of  be- 
coming. Proof  of  immortality  lies  here,  for  we  can- 
not conceive  of  an  end  to  the  process  any  more 
than  we  can  conceive  of  an  end  to  numbers.  Again, 
since  impersonal  mind  creates  and  manifests  ex- 
actly as  we  think,  itrnust  manifest  immortality,  for 
we  never  cease  to  impress  the  concept  of  immor- 
tality upon  it.  The  first  law  of  t  nature  is  self- 
preservation;  and,  by  a  common  instinct,  we  im- 
press this  idea  on  impersonal  mind.  Thus  we  im- 
press the  idea  of  life;  and  it  manifests  as  life;  of 
immortality  and  it  manifests  as  immortality.  Phys- 
ical death  must  not  be  confounded  with  the  experi- 
ence of  the  soul.  Thus  death  should  be  thought  of, 
not  as  the  end  of  things,  but  as  the  beginning.  It  is 
not  a  "taking  off"  but  a  taking  on.  Thus  is  death 
swallowed  up  in  victory  by  the  soul  that  "knows 
Him  in  whom  it  has  believed." 

XXII.    "I  Am  He"    .     .  K"*} 173 

We  have  thus  discovered  the  law  of  life  and  mind 
and  our  control  through  knowledge.  The  one  great 
need  of  human  thought  has  been  shown  to  be  the 
distinct  necessity  of  recognising  Spirit  as  such  from 
Alpha  to  Omega.  Then  being  and  becoming  shall  be 
found  in  their  true  relationship.  To  know  God  and 
the  self  is  life  eternal.  Thus  being  has  its  perfect 
becoming.  Our  age  demands  that  in  our  becoming 
we  reveal  the  true  nature  of  Being.  The  marriage 
of  Being  and  Becoming  is  effected  when  the  mes- 
sage and  the  messenger  are  one.  Like  Jesus,  we 
may  appear  declaring,  "I  am  he."  "I  am"  is  being: 
"I  am  he"  is  becoming.  The  new  Messiah  is  he 
who  embodies  the  truth  of  being;  and  thus  man 
speaks  while  the  Father  dwelling  in  him  doeth 
the  works. 


PART  I. 
BEING  AS  THE  IMPERSONAL  LIFE. 


CHAPTER  I. 
BEING  OR  THE  CHANGELESS  LIFE. 

WE  live  in  the  midst  of  God  and  yet  we  do 
not  know  Him.  Mysteries  press  in  upon 
us  on  every  hand  and  yet  we  fail  to  un- 
derstand. A  worm  goes  to  sleep  and  wakes  up  a 
butterfly;  an  egg  is  warmed  for  three  weeks  in  a 
drawer  and  a  chicken  breaks  forth  from  its  marble 
cell;  a  bullet  cuts  its  way  through  shrieking  flesh 
and  internal  agents  restore  every  organ,  cell  for  cell 
and  nerve  for  nerve.  A  nut,  an  egg  or  a  grain  of  ^/ 
sand  hides  within  it  the  secret  of  life.  To  explain 
one  of  them  is  to  explain  everything.  Yet  how 
often  it  is  looked  upon  either  as  a  miracle  or  a 
fraud  when  a  man  turns  the  inspired  eye  of  faith 
to  an  inner  power  and  is  lifted  from  the  very  bed 
of  death  itself,  or  in  dire  financial  straits  calls  upon 
God  and  finds  supply,  or  in  peril  by  sea  or  land 
discovers  a  guardian  angel  who  points  out  for  him 
a  star  and  a  way.  How  rash  we  are  in  these  days 
of  mystery,  when  science  has  discovered  that  the 
'  more  we  know  the  less  we  know,  to  declare  that 
with  God  any  thing  is  impossible!  And  perhaps 
we  are  still  more  rash  when  we  dare  to  pass  critical 

3 


4  Being  and  Becoming 

judgment  on  the  use  of  any  power,  whether  we  call 
that  power  God  or  mind  or  consciousness  or  truth. 
No  power  used  to  lighten  the  burdens  of  life  or  to 
inspire  the  soul  to  renewed  faith  and  effort  can  be 
anything  but  good.  Some  day  all  men  shall  know 
this  is  true  and  that  the  first  and  greatest  of  all 
sayings  is  this,  "Hear,  O  Israel,  the  Lord  thy  God, 
the  Lord  is  one  and  beside  me  there  is  none  other." 
Then  force,  energy  and  life  shall  be  found  to  come 
from  a  common  source  and  whosoever  shall  lift 
the  burden  of  another's  woe  and  pain  through  the 
use  of  the  forces  at  his  command  shall  do  the  will 
of  my  Father  who  is  in  heaven. 

What,  then,  is  the  wonder  that  lies  back  of  a  nut, 
an  eggf  or  a  grain  of  sand,  a  healed  wound,  the 
cure  of  a  cancer,  the  demonstration  of  success,  and 
the  glory  of  an  uplifted  faith?  We  can  at  least 
get  closer  to  the  Causal  Mystery  even  though  our 
investigations  show  us  more  of  what  we  do  not 
know  than  what  we  know.  And,  even  though 
ab^Shed  by  what  he  discovers,  man  may  still  feel 
that  "haply  he  knows  somewhat  more  than  he 
knows ;"  and  even  in  the  nut,  the  eggf  and  the  grain 
of  sand  he  may  find  a  common  factor  which  relates 
them  to  each  other  and  perhaps  to  himself. 

There  is  no  beauty  in  a  nut.  It  is  simple  and 
homely;  and  it  would  appear  that  a  botanist  could 
make  a  much  finer  one  than  nature  provides.  But 
he  cannot !  He  can  stir  up  the  chemicals  that  com- 
pose it,  and  mould  them  into  the  shape  of  a  nut — 


Being  or  the  Changeless  Life 


but  he  cannot  make  it  grow.  There  is  something 
in  the  nut  which  he  cannot  imitate;  there  is  some- 
thing in  it  back  of  which  he  cannot  go  with  his 
analysis.     We  call  it  the  life-principle.  * 

Where  in  an  egg  shall  we  find  the  secret  of  the 
chicken?  Not  one  drop  of  blood,  nor  so  much  as 
the  daintiest  shadow  of  down  would  we  surprise 
within  the  shell ;  and  were  we  to  break  through  the 
frail  door,  we  should  render  it  but  an  open  tomb, 
for  even  as  we  search  its  -shapeless  form  we  find 
that  the  imprisoned  splendor  has  escaped,  carrying 
its  secret  with  it.  Where  was  that  which  might 
have  been  the  tiny  chick ;  what  was  "it,"  where  is  it, 
what  is  it  now  ?  And  were  we  to  have  allowed  it  to 
grow  into  a  body  and  then  dissected  flesh  and  bone, 
we  should  never  have  taken  unawares  the  sleeping 
yet  wakeful  mystery.    Life  cannot  be  dissected. 

The  chemist  dissolves  the  grain  of  sand  and  de- 
clares that  he  has  solved  the  problem  of  the  mineral 
kingdom  and  discovered  its  law  by  calling  it  "chem- 
ical affinity."  But  what  is  chemical  affinity?  *It 
is  the  name  of  a  force.  The  chemist  does  not  know 
what  the  force  is;  he  knows  only  that  it  is.  He 
has  learned  something  about  it,  but  like  the  botanist 
and  the  biologist,  he  has  not  learned  it.  The  dis- 
covery of  the  supreme  fact  of  its  nature  or  law, 
however,  has  done  much  for  us  in  solving  the  rid- 
dle, for  it  has  betrayed  intelligent  activity.  Indeed, 
something  within  minerals  opens  them  to  the  influ- 
ence of  mind;  and  vibrations  sent  out  at  the  will 


6  Being  and  Becoming 

of  the  operator  can  magnetize  them.  What  is  that 
principle  within,  which  is  thus  acted  upon  by  mind 
and  which  acts  with  the  intelligence  of  mind?  It 
is  something  of  which  again  we  may  say,  "It  is, 
and  we  know  how  it  is ;  but  we  do  not  know  what 
it  is."  Yet  because  it  betrays  intelligence  and  be- 
cause intelligence  is  a  characteristic  of  mind,  we 
may  give  to  it  a  new  name — life. 

The  greatest  of  scientists  to-day  are  telling  us 
that  we  live  in  a  universe  alive  with  intelligence; 
and  the  advanced  investigator  does  not  hesitate  to 
declare  that  all  nature  is  alive.  But  if  we  declare 
that  our  riddle  is  answered  by  the  word  life,  what 
have  we  ?  We  have  this — that  we  have  reduced  the 
universe  to  one;  and  we  have  found  that  it  is  re- 
lated to  us  in  some  way.    But  what  is  "life"? 

It  is  a  curious  thing  that  we  should  thus  live  in  a 
living  universe;  and  yet  not  be  able  to  tell  what 
life  is.     It  is  one  of  Nature's  paradoxes. 

For  life  we  know,  and  knowing,  do  not  know, 
Yet  know  we  whence  we  come,  and  whither  go: 

For  life  is  all,  and  plays  the  master  role, 
It  is  its  own  true  witness  to  its  fact: 

Illusive,  subtle  substance  of  the  soul 
That  ever  gives  of  self,  and  yet  remains  intact. 

All  that  we  can  say  is  that  life  is;  and  the  ab- 
sence of  it  is  what  men  call  death.  But  wre  can  go 
on  studying  how  it  acts  and  the  law  by  which  it  is 


Being  or  the  Changeless  Life  7 

governed  or  by  which  it  governs,  in  order  that  by 
our  knowledge  we  may  control  our  body  and  af- 
fairs. 

Life  is  Absolute  or  All. 

Probably  the  most  important  discovery  of  the 
new  science  of  life  is  that  it  is  universally  present. 
We  no  longer  think  of  life  as  being  found  only  in 
some  entity,  here  in  a  lily,  there  in  a  dog;  but  we 
find  it  everywhere,  here  in  the  stone  and  there  in 
the  star.  There  are  plenty  of  evidences  of  life  mani- 
festing itself  in  inarticulate  nature ;  of  Life  of  which 
when  we  find  It,  we  can  but  acknowledge  the  pres- 
ence ;  we  cannot  say  what  it  is.  We  can  only  say, 
"It  Is." 

The  great  seer,  Moses,  perceived  the  presence 
of  this  life  in  the  flaming  bush.  In  himself  and  in 
nature,  he  discovered  something  more  than  form 
and  beauty:  he  found  "that  Something"  in  nature 
that  replied  to  a  something  in  himself;  and  com- 
muning with  It,  he  asked,  "What  is  your  name?" 
He  could  not  define  this  Presence ;  but  it  seemed  to 
say,  "I  AM  THAT  I  AM."  "I  AM"  denotes  life 
or  existence;  and  "THAT  I  AM"  shows  that  it 
cannot  be  defined  in  terms.  But  that  which  can- 
not be  defined  in  terms  must  be  the  Absolute.  Life, 
then,  is  Absolute.  It  is  All.  "The  All"  is  found, 
therefore,  not  merely  in  nature  and  in  man,  but  as 
nature  and  as  man,  and  yet  more  than  nature  and 


8  Being  and  Becoming 

man.  All  that  we  perceive  is  one  and  inseparable 
with  it,  for  all  is  life.  This  Life  is  what  we  call 
Spirit. 

Spirit  is,  therefore,  Life,  Mind,  Intelligence,  All. 
So  anything  or  anyone,  or  all  can  say,  "I  am." 
"I  am"  comes  from  the  verb  "to  be"  and  denotes 
"being."  Being,  therefore,  indicates  that  which  is, 
apart  from  time  or  space.  It  is  "that  which  was 
in  the  beginning,  is  now,  and  ever  shall  be."  Nor 
is  it  something  outside  of  us.  It  is  rather  something 
within  us  which  makes  us  what  we  are.  It  is 
Spirit  or  First  Cause  in  us;  it  is  that  "subtle  sub- 
stance of  the  soul"  coming  forth  into  expression 
and  manifesting  as  things.  The  body  accordingly 
is  spirit.  We  see  it  as  body  from  the  outside  or 
objective  point  of  view.  But  if  we  view  it  from 
within,  it  is  spirit  or  being.  So  all  things  are  one  in 
essence,  for  all  are  being ;  and  being  is  all  or  abso- 
lute. 

Yet  being  takes  "soul-form"  or  thought-form,  so 
that  within  the  lily  is  the  eternal  idea  of  lily  which 
always  gives  birth  to  a  lily  from  a  lily  bulb ;  and  a 
rose  always  gives  birth  to  a  rose.  Each  form  of 
life  gives  birth  after  its  own  kind.  This  is  inter- 
estingly illustrated  in  the  example  of  a  tree.  At 
one  time,  the  botanist  supposed  that  sap  is  drawn 
through  the  trunk  and  branches  of  a  tree  entirely 
by  capillary  action,  that  is,  mechanical  force.  Yet 
it  is  now  known  that  a  tree  will  die  from  a  shock 
even  while  its  pores  are  unimpaired,  showing  that 


Being  or  the  Changeless  Life  9 

more  than  mechanical  action  is  needed  to  explain 
it.  In  other  words,  there  must  be  an  organized  in- 
telligence within  the  tree  which  governs  and  sus- 
tains its  life.  When  a  shock  or  injury  occurs,  this 
intelligence  withdraws,  leaving  the  shell  which  it 
had  built  for  itself  to  disintegrate  into  elemental 
substance  again.1 

We  have  here,  then,  sufficient  evidence  to  show 
that  each  "living  thing"  in  nature  has  a  soul.  We 
will  not  hesitate  to  say  that  the  soul  exists  as  the 
"being"  of  the  tree,  the  life-principle,  the  thought- 
form,  spirit  acting  as  the  idea  of  tree  within,  and 
taking  on  its  body  as  a  tree.  The  soul  of  the  tree, 
the  soul  of  a  lily,  the  soul  of  a  bird,  the  soul  of  a 
man,  is  that  within  which  makes  each  thing  appear 
in  its  chosen  form.  The  soul  is  the  individualiza- 
tion of  spirit  and  shares  the  nature  of  the  All-Soul. 
It  is  the  life-principle  and  is  what  we  call  being. 
When  we  speak  of  it  as  One  or  the  Whole,  we  call 
it  Absolute  or  Eternal  Being.  It  is  eternal  in 
essence,  never  changes  from  age  to  age.    It  Is. 

1  The  elemental  substance  must  in  the  _  nature  of  the  case  be 
simply  disorganized  thought-energy  which  is  produced  by  Creative 
Mind  as  ready-made  material  upon  which  the  soul-principle  may 
draw. 


CHAPTER\II.  J 
BECOMING  OR  THE  CHANGING  FORM. 

WE  live  not  only  in  a  world  of  being  but  also 
in  a  world  of  becoming.  Being  is  unfolding 
itself  or  passing  itself  into  manifestation. 
In  being  is  the  infinite  possibility ;  in  becoming,  this 
possibility  is  expressing.  In  creation,  the  Creator 
is  passing  into  the  created.  Since  Spirit  is  All,  It 
must  be  the  substance  of  all.  There  is  nothing  but 
Itself.  In  making  a  universe,  It  must  fashion  it 
out  of  the  only  material  available — Itself  or  Being. 
As  Being  is  also  Mind,  Its  activity  is  that  of 
thought ;  and  whatever  Spirit  makes,  It  must  make 
by  passing  its  one  essence — Mind — out  into  the 
many  expressions — form — through  the  mould  or 
channel — thought.  To  be  is  to  think ;  to  think  is  to 
create.  Creation  is  eternally  going  on.  Spirit  is 
eternally  being  transformed  or  brought  across  into 
visible  concrete  substance.  Or  we  may  say  that 
Spirit  is  substance  wrhich  now  passes  into  form. 
The  growth  of  a  lily  wrell  illustrates  it.  In  the 
bulb  is  the  potential  form  of  the  lily.  The  life-prin- 
ciple or  soul  is  hidden  in  the  bulb.    At  any  point 

10 


Becoming  or  the  Changing  Form         11 

in  the  growth  of  the  lily,  two  facts  are  cognizable. 
The  lily  has  being  or  life.  We  can  say  of  it,  "It  is." 
In  its  being,  it  is  untroubled,  unhurried,  unworried, 
unshaken.  It  has  potential  power  and  infinite  calm. 
But  in  its  growth,  it  is  also  becoming.  It  is  taking 
form  and  expressing  beauty.  Life,  spirit,  or  being 
is  passing  into  manifestation  in  the  form  of  a  lily. 
Being  is  becoming  manifest.  "Consider  the  lily," 
said  the  Great  Teacher,  "God  clothes  it." 

As  in  the  lily,  so  in  us  and  in  all  things,  there  is 
great  potential  power,  the  power  of  being,  while 
we  press  on  to  the  goal  of  our  becoming.  Spirit  is 
expressing  or  becoming  manifest  through  us.  It 
is  in  this  way  that  the  universal  can  individualize 
itself.  It  is  through  the  recognition  of  the  nature 
of  the  individual  self  that  we  can  grasp  the  idea  of 
and  contact  the  universal.  Expansion  of  conscious- 
ness must  inevitably  follow  in  the  wake  of  truth. 

We  must  rise  to  the  glory  of  this  truth :  man  is 
spirit,  individualized  into  self-consciousness.  God 
is  on  a  glorious  adventure  through  each  of  us.  We 
are  like  the  wave  that  rises  on  the  bosom  of  the 
ocean.  No  matter  how  high  or  how  proudly  it 
may  toss  its  crest,  no  matter  what  shape  and  form 
it  may  assume,  no  matter  how  peaceful  or  threat- 
ening, no  matter  how  it  may  conceive  itself  as  apart 
from  the  rest:  still  it  lies  forever  on  the  breast  of 
the  sea,  still  it  shares  the  nature  and  power  of  its 
source,  still  it  is  related  to  every  other  individual. 
There  never  can  be  any  real  separation  in  spirit. 


12  Being  and  Becoming 

In  the  end,  we  must  recognize  in  each  our  other 
self.    The  poet  recognized  the  truth  in  these  words : 

"Whether  the  time  be  slow  or  fast, 

Enemies  hand  in  hand,  m 

Must  come  together  at  the  last 

And  understand. 
No  matter  how  the  die  is  cast 

Or  who  may  seem  to  win, 
We  know  that  we  must  love  at  last: 

Why  not  begin?" 

Thus,  if  we  will  but  recognize  it,  we  are  every 
one  of  us  sons  of  the  Most  High  with  the  capacity 
to  do  all,  be  all,  and  enjoy  all  that  heart  could  de- 
sire. 

In  practice  we  have  but  to  recognize  that  we  are 
in  the  cosmic  stream  of  consciousness  which  is  con- 
tinuously manifesting  in  newer  and  higher  forms 
of  life,  and  then  to  allow  it  to  become  manifest  for 
us.  It  is  most  important  to  note  that  creation  is 
still  going  on;  we  do  not  live  in  a  world  that  has 
been  made ;  we  live  in  a  world  that  is  being  made ; 
we  live  in  a  universe  of  "becoming."  Nothing  in 
nature  is  static ;  everything  is  in  movement,  change, 
and  transition.  The  earth  on  which  we  dwell  is 
forever  altering,  clothing  and  reclothing  itself  in 
garments  of  verdure;  pouring  its  hidden  energies 
out  into  form  in  the  woodland  violet  and  the  giant 
Sequoia;  emptying  its  sweetness  in  the  perfume 
of  the  lily  and  the  fragrance  of  the  orange  tree. 

Just  SO'  our  bodies  and  conditions  are  forever 


Becoming  or  the  Changing  Form         13 

changing;  and  being  is  becoming  manifest  in  new- 
ways.  New  life  cells  are  born  every  hour.  Within 
a  year  every  organ  and  bone  of  the  body  has  been 
born  anew7.  Many  parts  of  the  body  like  the  cuticle 
of  the  hand  are  born  daily.    It  is  literally  true  that 

"Every  day  is  a  fresh  beginning, 
Every  morn  is  the  world  made  nelv: 

Ye  who  are  weary  of  sorrow  and  sinning, 
Here  is  a  beautiful  hope  for  you — 

A  hope  for  me,  and  a  hope  for  you — 
EVERY  DAY  IS  THE  WORLD  MADE 
NEW!"      0  , 

"Behold  I  make  all  things  new/'  is  the  claim  of 
the  Supreme  Being.  "I  am  forever  becoming^mani- 
fest." 


\ 


CHAPTERHII.  ) 
BEING  IS  BECOMING  THROUGH  US. 

THE  importance  of  this  fact  must  not  escape 
us,  "I — Absolute  Being  or  Spirit — make." 
Man  does  not  have  to  make;  Spirit  makes. 
"I  will  work  and  who  can  hinder  it!"  The  inner 
principle  of  all  life,  plant  or  planet,  animal  or  man, 
is  forever  producing;  and  it  may  be  called  into  ex- 
pression in  our  lives.  "Behold  I  stand  at  the  door 
and  knock;  if  any  man  will  open,  I  will  come  in." 
"Spirit  seeks  its  worshipers."  The  creative  process 
is  going  on  in  you.  "Stand  still  and  behold  the 
salvation  of  your  God."  What  a  relief  from  strug- 
gle !  You  do  not  need  to  lie  awake  at  night  saying 
to  the  heart,  "Beat  seventy-two  times  a  minute :"  to 
the  lungs,  "Take  a  breath  now ;"  to  the  blood,  "Go 
'round  and  'round."  All  this  is  the  involuntary 
functioning  of  the  life  in  you,  under  the  direction 
of  the  inner  mind.  So,  too,  we  do  not  need  to  say, 
"I  must  make  a  new  cell  where  this  one  is  worn 
out:  I  must  make  a  little  more  gastric  juice  to  di- 
gest this  food."  Man  does  not  have  to  create;  he 
merely  allows  spirit  to  manifest  its  innate  power, 
to  permit  being  to  become  through  him, 

14 


Being  is  Becoming  Through  Us  15 

This  spirit  is  in  you  now  ready  to  do  whatever 
is  necessary  for  your  health  and  supply.  You  are 
at  one  with  all  being,  and  within  you  is  the  All- 
Power  ready  to  act. 

i 

'Then  go  not  thou  in  search  of  him, 

But  to  thyself  repair; 
Wait  thou  within  the  silence  dim 

And  thou  shalt  find  him  there." 

All  great  healing  is  done  on  the  basis  of  this 
realization,  that  the  work  is  being  done  for  us.  We 
are  not  forced  to  "hold  thoughts,"  repeat  denials, 
or  make  affirmations  until  the  brain  begins  to  stag- 
ger. To  do  this  is  to  pass  the  struggle  over  from 
physical  to  mental  gymnastics.  If  we  are  to  stop 
beating  the  body,  cracking  the  bones,  boiling  in 
mud,  taking  electric  shocks,  only  to  "do"  our  de- 
nials, affirm  our  affirmations,  and  count  the  rosary 
of  our  formulated  phrases,  with  any  idea  that  we 
are  doing  the  job,  we  might  as  well  quit  now.  Re- 
member Moses!  "He  said  unto  them,  'Hear,  now, 
ye  rebels;  shall  we  bring  you  forth  water  out  of 
this  rock?'  And  Moses  lifted  up  his  hand,  and 
smote  the  rock  with  his  rod  twice :  and  water  came 
forth  abundantly;  and  the  congregation  drank  and 
their  cattle.  And  Jehovah  said  unto  Moses  and 
Aaron,  'Because  ye  believed  not  in  me,  to  honor  me 
in  the  eyes  of  the  children  of  Israel;  therefore  ye 
shall  not  bring  this  assembly  into  the  land  which  I 
have  given  them/  " 


16  Being  and  Becoming 

We  are  entered  into  truth  to  find  peace;  and,  if 
we  struggle  along  on  the  basis  that  we  must  do  the 
work,  we  can  never  enter  the  promised  land.  One 
woman  said,  "I  have  discovered  I  have  seven 
bodies;  and  I  am  trying  to  subdue  them;  but  life 
is  a  constant  struggle.  I  subdue  them  one  by  one; 
but  by  the  time  I  get  the  seventh  put  under,  the 
first  is  all  up  in  arms."  Another  was  asked  by  her 
friends  to  join  in  some  activities;  but  she  said,  "I 
have  no  time  for  such  things :  I  must  go  and  do  my 
denials  and  affirmations."  I  have  seen  people  abso- 
lutely bewildered  by  the  effort  to  heal  themselves 
by  "holding  the  right  thought;"  and  I  have  often 
heard  metaphysicians  say,  "I  will  work  for  you," 
as  though  there  were  something  they  had  to  do. 
As  a  matter  of  fact,  "we  do  not  have  to  struggle, 
we  only  have  to  know."    The  poet  truly  said, 

"I  am  not  fighting  my  fight, 
I  am  singing  my  song." 

Said  Jesus,  "Can  a  man,  by  taking  thought,  add 
one  cubit  to  his  stature?"  Of  course  not.  Neither 
denials  nor  affirmations  are  creative.  We  should 
carefully  distinguish  between  the  terms,  creative 
thought  and  creative  mind.  Strictly  speaking, 
thought  does  not  create:  mind  creates.  The  crea- 
tive function  is  still  going  on;  Creative  Mind  is 
building  for  us;  spirit  is  passing  into  manifesta- 
tion, being  is  becoming ;  we  do  not  have  to  struggle, 
but  rather  do  we  say  to  the  God  within, 


Being  is  Becoming  Through  Us  17 

"Build  me  more  stately  mansions,  O  my  soul." 

What  we  need  to  do  is  to  recognize  the  presence 
of  the  spiritually-perfect  being,  which  we  are;  and 
thus  allow  it  to  become,  which  it  will  do! 

The  Faith  of  a  Child. 

Thought  itself,  then,  does  not  create.  Creation 
goes  on  without  our  conscious  thought;  and  con- 
scious thought  simply  acts  as  a  mould  to  spirit  as 
it  passes  through.  This  is  why  a  child's  life  is 
normally  so  healthy  and  serene.  It  does  not  put  up 
any  barrier  to  the  flow  of  pure  spirit.  It  does  not 
interpose  fear  or  doubt.  It  takes  all  on  faith ;  and 
the  creative  impulse  goes  on  to  build  its  growing 
body  and  fill  its  heart  with  joy.  A  friend  of  mine, 
who  was  a  teacher  in  one  of  the  grade  schools,  had 
a  lame  wrist  and  felt  herself  unable  to  get  the  right 
thought  about  it.  So  she  went  to  a  little  five-year- 
old  boy  in  her  room  and  said,  "John,  I  hear  that 
you  healed  Miss  So-and-So's  finger  ?  Do  you  think 
you  could  heal  my  wrist  ?"  "Yes,  teacher,  let  me 
hold  it."  So  he  took  the  wrist  between  his  little 
hands  and  sat  silent  for  a  moment.  "It  will  be 
all  right,  now,"  he  said.  And  it  was  healed  imme- 
diately. Other  cases  might  be  cited  in  which  chil- 
dren have  demonstrated  the  power  of  unreasoning 
faith.  Among  some  of  our  acquaintances,  the  whole 
family  depends  on  the  faith  of  one  of  the  children. 
Whenever  sickness  occurs,  they  all  turn  to  the  boy 


18  Being  and  Becoming 

or  girl.  The  faith  of  a  little  child  is  the  faith  that 
sees  God  at  work  for  us,  bearing  our  burdens,  pro- 
viding for  our  necessities,  living  in  His  creation,  a 
Presence  in  everything,  working  for  our  good.  To 
realize  this  is  the  acme  of  spiritual  understanding. 
"No  evil  shall  befall  thee,  neither  shall  any  plague 
come  nigh  thy  dwelling.  He  shall  give  his  angels 
charge  over  thee  to  keep  thee  in  all  thy  ways."  Be- 
ing is  becoming;  that  which  is  unmanifest  is  becom- 
ing manifest ;  and,  as  it  is  perfect  in  being,  it  must 
also  be  perfect  in  becoming,  if  we  will  but  recognize 
the  truth  of  being  and  become  fit  channels  for  its 
expression.  For  we  are  individuals;  and  spirit  can 
become  for  us  only  in  the  measure  of  our  choice 
and  channel.  Ours  it  is  to  open  or  shut  the  door 
to  Spirit.1 

How  we  may  assume  the  attitude  of  mind  that 
will  assure  the  most  perfect  expression  of  spirit 
in  our  bodies,  affairs,  and  states  of  consciousness, 
we  shall  study  in  succeeding  chapters.  Let  us  here 
open  our  thought  to  the  influx  of  spirit  as  faith. 

I  do  rest  in  the  calm  assurance  that  all  that  the 
Father  hath  is  mine.  I  know  that  "beneath  me  are 
the  girders  of  the  Almighty  and  underneath  are 
the  Everlasting  Arms."  "The  Lord  is  my  light 
and  my  salvation,  wrhom  shall  I  fear  ?  The  Lord  is 
the  strength  of  my  life,  of  whom  [or  what]  shall 
I  be  afraid?"    "My  Father  is  greater  than  I."     I 


1This   is   not   to   be   construed   in   any  way   as   opposing   the   right 
use    of    affirmations. 


Being  is  Becoming  Through  Us  19 

will  "rest  in  the  Lord  and  wait  patiently  for  Him." 
"I  will  look  unto  the  hills  from  wrhence  cometh  our 
help ;  my  help  cometh  from  the  Lord  which  makes 
heaven  and  earth."  I  do  now  answer  the  command 
of  my  soul,  "Come  unto  me  all  ye  that  labor  and 
are  heavy-laden ;  and  I  will  give  you  rest."  Father, 
I  rest  my  case  in  thy  hands  and  now  know  that 
thou  wilt  give  me  fully  and  freely  this  thing  which 
I  seek. 


CHAPTER   IV. 

THE  MENTAL  UNIVERSE— WHY  WE  CALL 
THINGS  IDEAS. 

THE  first  principle  of  life  is  this,  "I  am  or 
being."  All  human  knowledge  begins  here. 
It  is  not  a  matter  of  proof  but  of  intuition. 
I  know  that  I  am.  And  if  I  do  not  know  that  I  am, 
I  do  not  know  anything,  for  there  is  no  one  to  know 
it.  And  I  also  know  that  this  "I  am"  is  a  self.  I 
reach  this  conclusion  by  the  necessary  observation 
that  the  "I  am"  which  I  know  I  am  is  different  in 
many  respects  from  others  around  me.  So  that  I 
know  that  I  am  a  self;  that  is,  I  have  a  life  which 
I  myself  direct,  and  of  which  I  myself  am  con- 
scious. At  the  same  time,  I  realize  that,  in  some 
subtle  way,  this  self  is  related  to  all  selves  and  all 
being  because  being  must  be  one,  as  we  have  already 
seen.  Again,  since  being  is  all,  the  life  that  mani- 
fests everywhere  must  be  the  life  of  the  One.  I 
cannot  get  away  from  the  fact,  therefore — and  I 
do  not  wish  to — that  each  thing  that  I  see  about  me 
is  an  expression  of  that  Being.  A  thing  is  the  form 
in  which  Spirit  embodies  itself  as  an  individual  en- 

20 


The  Mental  Universe  21 

tity,  as  we  saw  in  the  case  of  the  tree  in  Chapter 
One.  Nor  can  we  get  away  from  the  fact  that 
Mind,  since  it  is  the  substance  out  of  which  every- 
thing is  made  as  well  as  the  intelligence  that  makes 
it,  can  assume  any  form  of  self-expression  which 
it  desires.  It  is  probable,  therefore,  that  I  may  say 
of  the  tree  just  as  I  say  of  myself,  it  is  a  self. 
There  is  doubtless  a  tree-self,  just  as  there  is  a 
man-self.1 

Finally,  we  may  speak  in  general  terms  of  the 
thing  as  an  idea  of  spirit.  Since  Spirit  is  Mind 
and  since  Mind  acts  by  thought,  anything  that  it 
brings  forth  must  be  a  thought  creation  and  there- 
fore an  idea.  It  is  true  that  it  would  be  more  than 
what  we  ordinarily  think  of  as  an  idea,  for  it  acts 
with  a  definite  intelligence;  and  it  would  be  far 
more  perfect  language  to  say  that  the  tree,  for 
example,  is  God  thinking  the  thought  of  "tree"  and 
then  becoming  the  tree  which  He  thinks.  For  that 
is  the  way  that  Being  expresses  itself,  it  becomes 
the  thing  which  it  thinks  and  therefore  makes.  And 
in  the  case  of  all  form  and  life,  we  find  that  Being 
does  not  become  hurriedly ;  but,  by  some  process  of 
growth  from  within,  it  finally  unfolds  its  nature 
along  the  line  of  the  idea  which  it  has  conceived 
itself  to  be.  So  that  the  term  "idea"  is  very  use- 
ful in  the  language  of  the  newer  thought  because 
it  expresses  two  aspects  of  each  thing:  first,  the 
presence  of  mind  within  it,  for  mind  acts  by  ideas 

Compare  page  456,   Calkin's  Persistent  Problems  of  Philosophy. 


22  Being  and  Becoming 

or  concepts,  that  is,  by  thinking ;  second,  definiteness 
of  thought,  for  each  form  must  necessarily  have  a 
definite  thought  back  of  it,  or  it  would  not  come 
forth  in  form  at  all.  We  may  think,  then,  of  each 
thing  in  nature  as  being  embodying  itself  in  a  defi- 
nite idea  as  a  definite  self. 

When  we  learn  to  look  upon  the  world  in  this 
way,  we  enter  into  a  new  and  different  life,  for 
we  no  longer  see  inanimate  nature  and  the  cold 
and  colorless  forms  of  matter ;  but  we  see  and  feel 
the  vibrant  presence  of  the  Spirit  of  Life  Itself. 
Each  thing  is  being  assuming  form  and  coming 
forth  for  expression.  The  flower  has  a  voice  elo- 
quent of  God ;  the  sunset  betrays  his  glory  in  bril- 
liant colors;  and  the*  friendly  stars  are  the  lamps 
our  Father  sets  to  guide  our  feet  aright.  Each 
thing  that  we  see,  be  it  the  reef  or  rock  or  the  rip- 
pling tide,  the  shrilling  cricket  or  the  roaring  lion, 
is  revealed  as  Spirit  embodying  Itself  as  an  idea. 
We  live  in  a  universe  of  intelligence,  a  mental 
world,  wherein  everything  that  we  taste,  touch, 
smell,  see  or  hear  is  an  idea  of  being. 

And  all  this  will  show  us'  how  man  may  control 
the  affairs  of  his  life,  once  he  shall  perceive  his 
j  own  relationship  to  the  cosmic  order  and  his  own 
power  as  a  self  to  control  his  ideas  and  those  lesser 
intelligences  by  which  he  finds  himself  surrounded. 
We  must  therefore  turn  our  attention  next  to  a 
study  of  the  close,  relationship  between  all  selves 
and  ideas. 


The  Mental  Universe  23 

The  Unity  in  Nature. 

I  think  that  nothing  more  fully  shows  the  unity 
of  creation  and  the  Oneness  of  the  Mind  that  puts 
it  forth  than  the  fact  of  the  dependence  of  each 
thing  on  other  things  for  its  own  self-expression. 
Take  for  example  the  tree.  Being  is  here  indi- 
vidualizing itself  on  the  idea  of  tree.  The  tree  is  a 
distinct  life-form  and  has  an  individual  selfhood. 
It  is  an  entity  and  maintains  a  separate  existence, 
yet  see  what  it  shares  with  the  whole?  It  puts 
out  a  form  to  fit  its  environment.  If  it  is  in  a  val- 
ley where  it  has  plenty  of  freedom,  see  with  what 
lofty  self-confidence  it  rears  its  proud  head  and 
spreads  its  sweeping  branches.  If,  however,  it 
springs  from  a  seed,  carelessly  scattered  by  some 
mighty  giant  in  a  forest  of  giants,  the  young  sap- 
ling makes  its  way  timorously  and  unobtrusively 
to  the  light  until,  in  the  process  of  centuries,  it 
may  at  last  itself  become  a  king.  If  in  the  pathway 
of  the  winds,  the  young  oak  sets  its  roots  deeply 
and  defiantly  exposes  its  sturdy  branches  to  the 
sweeping  gale. 

Again,  the  very  color  of  a  tree,  it  must  bor- 
row, as  it  were,  from  all  nature.  It  has  no  color 
apparently  within  itself,  but  catches  the  rays  of 
the  sun,  absorbing  some,  reflecting  others  and  tak- 
ing on  just  that  shade  that  befits  its  own  particu- 
lar idea.  Nor  is  the  idea  of  color  entirely  within 
the  tree  itself,  for  it  must  depend  upon  the  mind 


24  Being  and  Becoming 

of  the  observer  for  the  full  effect  of  its  beauty. 
That  the  tree  can  never  be  a  fully-expressed  idea 
without  other  selves  outside  of  it,  to  appreciate  it, 
can  be  shown  by  a  simple  illustration.  If  I  "look" 
at  a  tree,  what  do  I  "see"?  Certain  vibrations  in 
the  ether  (which  is  the  physical  science  name  for 
Mind)  passing  as  light  to  my  eye,  impinge  upon 
the  surface,  causing  another  set  of  vibrations  to 
pass  through  the  eye  and  down  the  optic  nerve  to 
a  brain-center.  Here  they  cause  a  cell-explosion 
or  vibration.  At  the  same  moment  and  because 
of  it,  I  have  a  mental  image  or  subjective  vision  of 
a  tree.  And  the  rose  which  appears  to  me  to  be 
upon  the  tree  sends  forth  a  particular  vibration 
which  I  detect  and  I  say,  "It  is  red."  But  it  is  not 
the  red  in  the  rose  but  the  idea  of  red  awakened 
by  the  vibration  which  I  myself  "see."  Again,  I 
say  it  has  an  odor;  but  as  a  matter  of  fact,  I  get 
the  vibration;  and  my  mind  interprets  it  as  per- 
fume. I  touch  it  and  say  that  it  is  cool  because  the 
vibration  that  is  awakened  in  me  suggests  the  idea 
of  coolness. 

Our  Own  Thought  Necessary  to  the  Full 
Meaning  of  Things. 

So  I  might  go  on  to  show  that  all  nature  and 
things  are  united  with  every  other  person  and  thing 
and  dependent  for  their  full  perfection  and  ex- 
pression of  the  idea  upon  other  things  and  minds. 
They  are  not  appreciable  without  a  mind  to  appre- 


The  Mental  Universe  25 

date  them.  They  do  not  have  heat,  cold,  sound, 
odor,  color;  nor  taste  of  themselves.  These  are 
names  which  we  give  to  varying  degrees  of  vibra- 
tion which  we  interpret  according  to  our  own 
idea. 

It  has  been  necessary  to  speak  of  this  because 
all  the  so-called  modern  movements,  whether  Chris- 
tian Science,  Divine  Science,  or  New  Thought,  base 
their  teachings,  and  rightly,  on  true  scientific  prin- 
ciples, the  fact  that  we  live  in  a  world  of  ideas. 
"The  physicists  teach  us  that  there  is  nothing  in 
the  physical  world  exactly  corresponding  to  the 
different  colors,  sounds,  degrees"  of  heat  and  cold, 
flavors  and  odors  of  the  natural  world  as  we  know 
it.  Colors  and  the  rest,  they  teach,  are  mere  ideas ; 
and  the  Veal  causes'  of  these  ideas  are  forms  of 
vibration."2 

Thus,  referring  back  to  the  tree,  we  find  that  the 
idea  which  is  there  in  the  form  of  a  tree  is  Being 
become  manifest  in  vibrations  of  varying  degrees 
of  intensity  which  radiate  in  every  direction,  awak- 
ening in  the  minds  of  those  who  behold  it  the  idea 
of  color,  perfume,  and  beauty.  And  the  tree-self 
is  related  to  all  other  selves  and  is  never  complete 
apart  from  those  selves.  All  nature  is  interrelated 
in  the  same  way.  The  cloud  depends  upon  the  mist, 
the  mist  upon  the  sea,  the  sea  on  the  brook  and  the 
rain,  and  the  rain  on  the  cloud.  So»that  life  moves 
forever  round  in  the  circle  of  the  All-Mind. 


aCalkin's  Persistent  Problems  of  Philosophy,  page   121. 


26  Being  and  Becoming 

The  spring  is  mated  to  the  brook 

In  one  continuous  flow; 
The  sky  is  mated  to  the  sea 

In  one  long  crimson  glow; 
The  mountains  melt  into  the  mist, 

And,    stretching   rise   on   rise, 
They  range  afar  to  yonder  star 

And  mix  in  star-dust  skies. 

The  star  is  mirrored  in  the  spring, 

Its   spirit  mated  there: 
And  thus  the  great  round  circle  runs 

To  link  the  everywhere. 
'Tis  love  that  winds  through  things  and  minds 

In  one  long,  golden  chain; 
O'er  circles  vast,  love's  loop  is  cast, 

And  all  is  one  again. 

Each  thing  is  incomplete  without  every  other, 
just  as  a  word  is  incomplete  without  the  sentence 
or  the  letter  without  the  word.  And  as  words  have 
no  meaning  without  a  mind  to  assemble  and  cognize 
them,  so  there  must  be  a  mind  to  assemble  all  these 
factors  in  the  expression  of  any  one  idea  and  to 
perceive  each  thing  as  a  whole  or  entity  or  self. 
This  is  the  wonderful  function  of  the  individual 
mind,  even  of  the  animal,  for  it  doubtless  gets  im- 
pressions similar  to,  though  not  so  wonderful  as, 
our  own. 


CHAPTER    V. 

IF  "THINGS  ARE  IDEAS,"  WHAT 
IS  "REAL"? 

IT  is  plain  that  as  each  thing  or  idea  depends 
for  its  full-rounded  expression  upon  the  mind 
that  perceives  it,  as  we  have  already  seen ;  then 
a  question  might  arise  as  to  whether  there  is,  after 
all,  anything  there  for  us  to  cognize.  If  we  all  see 
colors  differently;  if  coolness,  softness,  odors,  and 
even  forms  and  vibrations  look  different  to  each  of 
us  (and  they  do  to  a  certain  degree)  what  factor  of 
the  idea  remains  permanent  ?  Is  there  a  "Thing-in- 
Itself "  ?  Is  not  everything  after  all  an  illusion,  and 
is  not  all  the  world  in  our  own  minds?  I  suspect 
that  this  question  will  sound  stupid  to  the  average 
person,  and  well  it  may;  yet  so  vexing  is  the  prob- 
lem of  reality  that  the  tallest  minds  have  often  lost 
their  bearings  here,  and  have  become  space-wan- 
derers while  the  mind  that  judges  everything  on 
the  face  of  it  has  by  an  instinct  of  nature  kept  what 
must,  in  the  light  of  present  understanding  of  the 
universe,  come  to  be  regarded  as  the  truer  path. 
But  let  us  ask  and  answer  the  question,  that  we 
may  see  why  we  call  things  real  and  not  illusions. 

27 


28  Being  and  Becoming 

i 
We  have  already  seen  that  Being  or  Mind  is  the 

substance  of  all  and  that  in  creation  we  find  Being 
becoming  manifest  or  expressed.  Life  would  not 
be  at  all  if  it  could  not  act  or  create.  Creation  is 
the  form  taken  by  God's  thought.  Recognizing  God 
or  the  inner  principle  of  all  as  Mind,  co-extensive 
with  infinity,  we  perceive  that  its  only  method  of 
action  is  mental,  that  is,  by  thought.  So  whatever 
expression  Being  has,  is  by  thought.  But  we  al- 
ways find  the  thought  or  expression  in  the  form  of 
vibration,  so  that  we  know  that  thought  is  vibration, 
force  or  energy} 

It  is  also  by  no  means  impossible  that  that  which 
we  call  Being,  Mind  or  Cosmic  Consciousness  is 
itself  of  the  same  nature  as  vibration.  In  other 
words,  consciousness  or  vibration  is  at  once  the  ma- 
terial of  God  and  the  universe.  If  this  be  so,  then  in 
the  act  of  what  we  call  creation,  the  only  thing  that 
would  be  necessary  would  be  to  lower  the  rate  of 
vibration  at  any  chosen  point  when  it  would  be- 
come what  we  call  "matter. "  The  thought  of  Crea- 
tive Mind  would  then  mould  this  substance  into 
form.  In  that  case,  we  have  no  problem  at  all  as 
to  how  the  transition  takes  place  from  mind  to 
thought  or  vibration,  since  both  are  one.  This 
would  do  away  with  the  whole  question  of  illusions 
since  whatever  we  "see,"  etc.,  would  be  the  ultimate 
real  itself,  or  God  in  individual  form. 


iRead  Chapter  VIII,  "Matter  or  Thought  in  Form,"  in  my  book, 
The  Law  of  Mind  in  Action, 


If  "Things  Are  Ideas"  29 

At  any  rate,  vibration,  or  thought,  is  the  substance 
of  the  visible  universe,  since  the  atom  is  but  a 
composite  of  energy.  Matter  is  therefore  thought 
in  form,  which  in  turn  can  be  recognized  only  by 
mind.  Man  is  aware  of  that  which  we  call  matter 
or  physical  substance  only  through  the  activity  of 
consciousness.  In  other  words,  the  energy  resident 
in  matter  produces  in  our  mind  a  series  of  psychic 
shocks  which  we  translate  into  an  interpretation  of 
matter  as  sound,  color,  odor,  and  so  on. 

It  is  a  fact,  then,  that  the  basis  of  matter  is  also 
the  basis  of  consciousness,  for  both  are  Being  in 
process  of  expression  or  vibration.  When,  there- 
fore, I  "see"  anything  I  am  perceiving  the  thought 
of  the  Creator  and  interpreting  it  through  my  mind 
which  is  akin  to  His.  In  other  words,  there  is 
something  real  outside  of  my  individualized  mind; 
but  I  can  cognize  it  only  because  it  is  related  to  my 
mind,  since  it  and  I  are  in  the  One  Mind ;  and  it  is 
an  idea  or  thought  appealing  to  me. 

Let  us  illustrate  the  principle  in  the  case  of  a 
rose.  Suppose  I  say,  "I  see  a  rose,"  and  then  close 
my  eyes  and  say,  "I  do  not  see  the  rose."  The 
rose  disappears  from  my  vision.  If  I  open  my  eyes 
again,  the  rose  reappears.  What  is  it  that  appears 
and  disappears?  Certainly  it  is  the  mental  image 
or  subjective  vision  of  the  rose  which  appears  and 
disappears.  Apparently  there  remains  something 
which  is  outside  my  own  conscious  thinking,  which 
does  not  so  quickly  appear  and  disappear,  for  there 


30  Being  and  Becoming 

is  the  presence  there  of  something  which  awakened 
my  attention  to  itself :  and  my  friends  see  a  rose 
in  the  same  place  and  at  various  times  without  my 
calling  their  attention  to  it. 

What  Is  Real? 

The  question  is,  which  is  real,  the  objective  rose 
which  stimulates  attention,  or  the  subjective  vision 
or  correspondent,  or  both,  or  neither  ?  The  answer 
is  not  difficult  in  the  light  of  what  we  have  already 
said.  Things  are  thoughts ;  and  the  source  is  mind 
or  consciousness.  Mind  puts  forth  its  thought 
clothed  in  form.  Here  the  thought  has  appeared 
as  a  rose:  but  a  thought  is  vibration  and  so  is  a 
rose.  On  the  objective  side  is  the  vibration  and 
form  which  my  physical  senses  caught  up  and  re- 
corded ;  on  the  subjective  side  there  is  the  awaken- 
ing in  my  consciousness  of  my  idea  of  a  rose.  That 
idea  has  always  been  there  because  it  is  a  part  of 
the  absolute  consciousness;  but  up  to  the  moment 
of  my  seeing  the  rose,  my  consciousness  was,  as  it 
were,  asleep  on  that  point.  The  vibration  from  the 
objective  rose  is  thought  awakening  a  mental  cor- 
respondent in  my  mind,  by  the  association  of  ideas. 
Hence  I  see  the  rose.  Now  the  "I"  that  sees  or  cog- 
nizes the  rose  perceives  it  as  a  thought  or  idea. 
There  is  no  difficulty  to  be  experienced  in  under- 
standing the  process  by  which  the  outer  idea  stimu- 
lates the  inner  idea,  when  we  realize  that  the  rose, 
and  I,  and  my  subjective  idea  of  a  rose  which  is  the 


If  'Things  Are  Ideas"  31 

symbol  that  appeared  to  me,  alike  exist  in  the  One 
Consciousness.  Accordingly  I  recognize  the  rose 
as  not  my  idea  alone  but  as  an  idea  or  thought  of 
the  Infinite  which  is  put  forth  in  a  form  to  be  seen 
by  all  individual  minds,  and  which  has,  therefore,  an 
entity  separate  from  my  ozvn  mind  or  thought.  It 
is  recognizable  to  me  because  I  am  a  thinker;  and 
it  is  a  thought.  In  this  way  and  because  there  is 
about  the  objective  rose  a  persistency  and  stability 
which  awakens  in  every  one  who  sees  it  the  idea 
of  a  rose,  I  can  tell  the  difference  between  my 
mere  fancies  or  hallucinations  and  reality.  There 
stands  forth  in  the  rose  a  residue  of  something 
apart  from  my  ideas  of  color,  smell,  or  feeling.  It 
is  the  idea  of  the  Infinite  Himself. 

Illusions. 

We  have  thus  seen  that  the  rose — like,  of  course, 
all  other  sensible  objects — exists  not  only  in  my 
mind  but  also  in  the  Divine  Mind  as  an  idea  clothed 
in  form,  and  is  therefore  independent  of  my  idea 
of  it,  to  the  extent  that  it  would  persist  if  my  in- 
dividual consciousness  were  withdrawn  from  it. 
It  is  true  that  the  full  beauty  and  wonder  of  crea- 
tion would  never  be  realized  without  an  individual 
mind  to  reclothe  it  in  living  colors ;  yet  it  does  not 
depend  for  its  existence  upon  that  mind.  It  is 
even  conceivable  that  the  Divine  Mind  that  sets  it 
forth  in  space  as  a  vibrant  form  may  perceive  it 
as  we  do,  not  devoid  of  color,  warmth,  and  sweet- 


32  Being  and  Becoming 

ness,  but  rather  with  a  finer  beauty  and  fragrance 
than  we  can  conceive;  and  there  it  stands  forth 
until  the  Mind  withdraws  the  thought.  It  is  thus 
that  we  must  consider  the  splendor  of  a  sunset,  the 
majestic  volume  of  the  Nile,  and  the  flaming  comet: 
they  would  still  be,  even  as  they  must  have  been, 
before  the  advent  of  man. 
They  would  still  be 

That   mystic,   magic  wonder,   mountain   and    sea, 

Made  by  the  thought  of  Him  who  sits  aloft, 
Who  joys  in  flower  and  tree. 

It  is,  therefore,  a  mistake  to  speak  of  the  com- 
mon experiences  of  mankind  as  illusions  and  to 
say  that  we  live  in  a  world  of  illusions.  It  is  true 
that  we  do  not  live  in  a  world  of  matter,  using  the 
word  matter  as  meaning  that  which  is  independent 
of  consciousness ;  but  the  objects  by  which  we  find 
ourselves  surrounded  are  real  objects  since  they 
are  the  thoughts  and  substance  of  the  Ultimate  Real, 
or  God.  To  call  them  an  illusion  is  to  say  that  we 
suppose  ourselves  to  perceive  something,  when  in 
reality  that  thing  does  not  exist  at  all.  This  is  ab- 
surd, for  if  there  were  no  real  thing  then  there 
would  be  nothing  to  call  my  attention  to  it  and  the 
mere  fancies  of  my  day-dreams  would  be  as  real 
as  my  perceptions  of  that  which  common  experience 
declares  to  be  of  more  value  at  least ;  an  imaginary 
dollar  would  be  as  good  as  a  coined  one.  Yet  you 
couldn't  buy  a  pound  of  sugar  with  an  imaginary 


If  "Things  Are  Ideas"  33 

dollar.  To  say  that  things  are  illusions  is  mental  sui- 
cide, because  it  makes  all  experiences  unreal,  de- 
stroys the  veracity  of  the  mind,  declares  that  rea- 
son is  not  dependable,  and  that  the  conclusions  of 
the  reason  cannot  be  depended  upon.  Then  what- 
ever the  reason  declares  would  also  be  not  depend- 
able ;  and  the  proclamation  that  we  live  in  a  world 
of  illusion  would  be  itself  an  illusion.  The  doc- 
trine of  illusions  leads  more  quickly  along  the  path- 
way of  pure  idiocy  than  anything  else  of  which  I 
happen  to  know. 

On  the  contrary,  to  say  that  the  thing  is  thought 
in  form,  and  as  such  has  reality,  is  to  live  in  a 
world  peopled  with  commonsense  entities,  and  liv- 
ing, vital,  real  ideas.  Things  are  thoughts  or  ideas, 
and  are  real,  because  in  essence  and  nature  they  are 
a  part  of  consciousness. 

Control  of  Life  Through  Thoughts  and  Ideas. 

The  value  of  this  study  must  not  be  overlooked. 
Its  purpose  is  to  lead  us  to  realize  more  perfectly 
our  relationship  to  the  universe  and  the  power  which 
we  may  exercise  over  things  because  they  are  ideas. 
Back  of  everything  we  see  is  the  thought  or  mind 
that  brought  it  into  expression.  On  the  subjective 
side  of  life,  I  am  one  with  the  Eternal  Thinker, 
and  share  to  a  certain  extent  His  consciousness  of 
everything.  That  is  why  I  can  understand  what  I 
see,  because  I  am  related  to  Him  who  made  them, 


34  Being  and  Becoming 

and  deep  seated  in  my  mystic  frame  is  the  mind 
that  can  know  and  interpret  all.  Moreover  through 
this  relationship,  I  may  bring  to  pass  the  things  / 
desire  to  be  changed  or  done.  For  I  can  set  up 
ideas  of  my  own  in  the  One  Mind ;  and  the  Creative 
Principle  will  act  upon  them.  I  control,  then, 
through  my  subjective  relationship  to  the  All.  I 
choose  what  I  shall  do  through  my  objective  facul- 
ties which  give  me  my  individuality.  Therefore  let 
us  declare  for  ourselves  this  truth: 

I  live  in  a  world  wherein  everything  is  thought 
in  form ;  it  is  the  idea  of  Mind ;  and  in  everything 
breathes  the  presence  of  God.  I  live  and  have  my 
being  in  this  All-Conscious  One  and  share  His  na- 
ture and  life.  I  understand  Him;  and  He  under- 
stands me.  I  accept  His  gifts  and  dare  to  call  upon 
Him  for  all  that  my  heart  can  crave.  I  feel  the 
vastness  of  His  nature  and  the  reality  of  His  Self- 
hood, for  were  He  less  than  person  He  could  not 
put  forth  the  ideas  which  thrill  me  with  the  mys- 
tery and  wonder  of  life.  I  worship  before  the 
Beauty  of  His  nature  expressed  in  the  colorful 
tintings  of  the  things  I  see:  His  majesty  in  the 
mountains:  His  Harmonious  Soul  in  the  song  of 
the  brooks  and  the  birds:  His  tenderness  in  the 
love  of  every  mating  and  mothering  thing.  All 
these  things  are  His  ideas ;  and  great  indeed  is  the 
marvel  of  that  Nature  that  puts  them  forth.  Like 
to  me  He  is,  for  we  can  understand  each  other's 
ideas.    I  therefore  rest  in  quiet  confidence  in  His 


If  "Things  Are  Ideas"  35 

power  to  act;  and  the  Love  that  moves  Him  both 
to  provide  for  my  necessities  and  to  carry  me  over 
the  rough  places  of  life. 

Be  still,  for  I  thy  Father  dwell 

Within  thine  inmost  soul: 
Be  still  and  let  my  Voice  command 

Thy  heart,  my  Word  control 
Thine  act :  oh,  rest  in  quiet  'til 

My  thought  shall  rule  thy  will. 


CHAPTER   VI. 
PERSONAL  AND  IMPERSONAL  MIND. 

ALL  nature  is  vibrant  with  the  presence  of 
Being  bursting  into  expression  in  the  flower- 
ing bush,  the  flitting  butterfly,  the  flaming 
sunrise  and  the  raging  torrent.  Each  thing  is  Be- 
ing clothing  itself  in  its  own  ideas.  It  is  God's 
thought  expressed  in  the  language  of  form  and 
beauty  and  sustained  by  the  presence  of  the  spirit 
embodied  in  it.  Each  thing  that  we  see  may  be 
regarded  as  a  self  in  the  truest  meaning  of  the 
word:  not,  it  is  true,  with  a  developed  self-con- 
sciousness as  in  human  life,  but  having,  neverthe- 
less, some  kind  of  sensational  and  emotional  ex- 
perience, a  true  entity  carrying  out  some  definite 
purpose  for  which  it  came  into  manifestation  as 
an  entity. 

We  cannot,  if  we  would,  get  away  from  the  fact 
that  Being  acts  as  a  self  in  each  individual  thing 
and  person,  for  all  is  one;  and  therefore  this  one 
must  be  in  each  individual  thing.  The  distinction 
between  persons  and  things  largely  disappears  in 
the  light  of  the  allness  of  Being,  and  becomes  merely 
a  difference  in  the  type,  purpose,  or  self-conscious- 

36 


Personal  and  Impersonal  Mind  37 

ness  of  the  varied  forms,  whether  plant,  animal  or 
man.  Such  an  understanding  must  make  the  uni- 
verse very  personal  to  us  and  take  from  us  the  fear 
we  once  entertained  of  the  so-called  impersonal 
forces  of  nature.  With  some  truth,  we  may  exclaim 
with  the  star-gazer, 

For  I  am  part  of  Him 

That  made  thee  shine; 
And  through  the  spaces  dim 

And  ether  fine, 
I  claim  thee  on  the  rim 

Of  heav'n  as  mine: 
My  star,  my  light,  my  beam, 

You  shine  for  me; 
And,  in  your  radiant  beam, 

The  light  I  see 
Of  Him  that  made  thee  shine — 

'Tis  God  and  thee.1 

We  therefore  see  Being  everywhere  acting  as 
the  personal  spirit  with  emotional  life  and  powers 
of  self -direction.  At  the  same  time,  we  should 
clearly  discriminate  between  the  personal  and  the 
impersonal  activity  of  Mind,  else  we  shall  be  fall- 
ing into  all  the  old  errors  of  thought  wherein  we 
shall  ever  be  at  cross  purposes  with  a  Will  and 
Mind  opposed  to  our  own.  For  this  reason  it  is 
well  for  us  to  study  the  other  aspect  of  Mind,  the 
impersonal.  And  we  can  find  no  better  illustra- 
tion than  in  the  study  of  the  individual  himself. 

xSongs  of  the  Silence,  by  the  author. 


38  Being  and  Becoming 

The  Personal  Mind  of  the  Individual. 

Each  of  us  has  a  mind  which  acts  in  two  ways, 
personal  and  impersonal.  The  personal  mind  each 
of  us  is  familiar  with.  This  is  the  mind  that 
chooses,  intellectualizes,  and  wills.  It  selects  the 
objects  of  its  desire  and  plans  and  purposes  what 
it  will  do.  It  conceives  ideas  and  insists  on  their 
fulfilment.  In  the  individual,  this  aspect  of  mind 
is  often  spoken  of  as  objective,  while  the  imper- 
sonal side  of  mind  is  often  spoken  of  as  subjec- 
tive. The  objective  mind,  as  we  know  it  in  the  in- 
dividual, is  largely  the  aspect  of  mind  which  he 
develops  to  contact  an  objective  environment.  The 
babe  is  born  into  the  world  practically  subjective, 
that  is,  acting  without  conscious  thought  or  choice. 
But  so  soon  as  the  child  begins  to  react  to  environ- 
ment, it  needs  an  individualization  of  mind  to  meet 
life's  emergencies.  This  it  develops.  When  it 
learns  that  a  cry  will  give  it  nourishment,  a  yell 
will  give  it  a  rattle,  and  the  word  "papa"  will  give 
it  anything,  it  has  begun  the  development  of  an 
objective  mind.  This  is  the  mind  with  which  we 
are  all  familiar  in  the  sprightly  intercourses  of 
life,  wherein  man  plans,  works  and  struggles.  But 
while  it  seems  to  be  the  outgrowth  of  man's  objec- 
tive necessities,  we  must  never  think  of  it  as  at  all 
separate  from  the  one  mind  which  the  individual 
has,  for  all  objective  faculties  lie  latent  in  subjec- 
tive mind;  and  it  is  only  because  it  is  potentially 


Personal  and  Impersonal  Mind  39 

there  that  man  can  develop  it  at  all.  The  personal 
self,  then,  is  simply  the  emergence  into  formal  ex- 
pression of  the  personal  spirit  which  each  one  of  us 
is.  It  is  the  consciousness  of  a  self  as  apart  from 
other  selves  and  persons,  to  the  extent  that  each 
knows  he  is  an  individual  who  chooses  and  wills 
as  a  distinct  self. 

The  Impersonal  Mind  of  the  Individual. 

On  the  other  hand,  there  is  an  activity  of  mind 
in  each  of  us  which  may  be  classed  as  impersonal. 
It  is  to  be  discovered  in  the  unconscious  process 
by  which  we  govern  the  breathing,  the  circulation 
of  the  blood,  the  birth  of  new  life  cells  and  the 
rejection  of  old  ones  which  we  pass  automatically 
through  the  pores  of  the  body,  the  kidneys,  and 
so  on.  It  is  the  phase  of  mind  that  acts  while  we 
sleep,  standing  guard  at  the  ear  to  open  it  to  the 
incoming  of  some  sounds  and  to  close  it  to  others. 
The  peaceful  ticking  of  the  clock,  the  rattle  of  the 
window-pane,  or  the  familiar  snore  of  our  com- 
panion, it  gracefully  turns  away  from  our  con- 
scious attention;  but  should  a  burglar  pry  at  the 
window  or  one  of  the  children  cry  for  water,  at 
once  the  subjective  mind  opens  the  doorway  of 
the  conscious  attention;  and  we  are  aroused  from 
our  slumbers. 

This  is  the  mind  that  can  hear  without  ears  and 
see  without  eyes,  as  has  been  abundantly  proven  in 
recent  years  by  experiments  of  various  kinds,    Mes- 


40  Being  and  Becoming 

sages  can  be  conveyed  to  it  and  from  it  to  other 
minds  without  the  aid  of  mechanical  agencies  by 
the  process  of  what  is  known  as  thought-transfer- 
ence or  mental  telepathy.  Apparently  everything 
that  ever  enters  the  storehouse  of  its  memory  is 
kept  there  without  loss,  although  it  may  never  again 
step  out  onto  the  threshold  of  objective  conscious- 
ness. It  is  the  phase  of  mind  through  which  our 
intuitions  are  brought  to  us  and  registered  upon  our 
attention.  Here  we  scatter  the  seeds  of  our  ambi- 
tions and  ideas;  and,  in  the  rich  soil  of  the  mind, 
these  ideas  take  root  and  grow  into  purposes  and 
plans.  Thus  genius,  seeking  expression  in  beauti- 
ful forms,  dreams  the  dream  in  the  stillness  of  the 
mind  within;  and  at  length  the  perfected  idea 
springs  forth  in  the  glory  of  the  chiseled  form. 

Whatever  falls  upon  the  rich  soil  of  this  mind 
is  bound  to  bear  fruit  of  some  kind,  for  with  tire- 
less activity  it  goes  to  work  to  "think  out"  for  us 
the  things  we  are  puzzling  over,  to  show  us  the 
best  way  to  go,  to>  act  both  as  teacher  and  servant 
for  us.  It  is  significant  that  this  is  the  mind  that 
has  charge  of  all  growth,  whether  it  be  in  the  bud- 
ding and  bloom  of  genius,  in  the  development  of 
the  full-rounded  purpose,  or  in  the  reconstruction 
of  the  body  through  the  creation  of  new  cells. 

There  is  surely  enough  here  to  betoken  the  infinite 
and  eternal  heritage  of  the  mind  within  us.  What 
mind  is  this  that  never  forgets,  that  creates  out  of 
the  raw  material  of  the  unseen  the  noblest  that  has 


Personal  and  Impersonal  Mind  41 

sprung  into  form  through  human  genius,  that  loves 
to  the  edge  of  the  grave  and  beyond,  that  builds 
and  molds  and  fashions  the  human  frame  in  con- 
tinuous growth?  These  are  attributes  of  a  vaster 
intelligence,  not  earth-  but  heaven-born.  For,  as 
noted  in  previous  chapters,  we  have  perceived  in 
nature  herself  the  same  creative  intelligence  in  ac- 
tive operation.  This  is  the  impersonal  activity  of 
the  Universal  Mind. 

Impersonal  Mind  Acts  Only  on  Ideas 
"Given"  to  It. 

But  just  why  do  we  call  it  impersonal?  We  call 
it  impersonal  because  it  is  not  the  phase  of  mind 
that  chooses  what  shall  come  to  pass.  The  per- 
sonal mind  chooses  what  it  shall  have  and  then 
passes  its  orders  over  to  the  impersonal  mind  to 
execute.  In  the  individual,  this  is  well  illustrated 
in  the  case  of  a  hypnotized  person.  In  this  state, 
the  subject  loses  his  consciousness  of  personality 
and  takes  on  the  personality  of  the  operator.  In- 
stead of  making  selections  of  ideas  for  himself,  he 
takes  whatever  idea  is  given  to  him  and  begins  to 
act  upon  that.  If  he  is  told  that  he  is  a  great  singer, 
he  tries  to  sing.  If  told  that  he  is  a  great  sculptor, 
he  tries  to  mold  and  chisel.  If  told  that  on  the 
following  day  at  12:01,  he  will  pull  out  his  watch 
and  wind  it,  he  takes  that  idea  and  the  next  day, 
to  his  own  personal  astonishment,  the  impersonal 
mind  carries  out  the  idea  that  was  impressed  upon 


42  Being  and  Becoming 

it;  and  he  winds  his  watch  in  the  public  market, 
or  wherever  he  may  chance  to  be. 

The  Universal  Impersonal. 

However,  we  must  not  make  the  mistake  of  con- 
ceiving of  a  personal  mind  apart  from  the  imper- 
sonal, for  the  personal  can  rise  into  individuality 
only  out  of  the  impersonal;  and  to  conceive  of  a 
personal  separate  from  the  impersonal  would  lead 
us  to  attempt  to  accomplish  things  by  human  will 
and  force  alone.  And  this  again  would  lead  to  a 
universe  of  many  minds,  God's  mind  and  each  of 
ours,  and  thus  to  eternal  conflicts  of  purpose  and 
consequent  turmoil.  Nor  should  we  ever  conceive 
of  an  impersonal  mind  apart  from  a  personal.  This 
would  lead  to  the  assumption  that  the  universe  is 
one  merely  of  mechanical  force,  and  thus  to  ma- 
terialism, atheism,  and  ignorance.  Back  of  all  per- 
sonal expressions  of  life  must  be  that  from  which 
they  spring.  And,  as  Being,  from  its  very  nature 
of  being  "That-which-Is,"  must  be  One,  the  im- 
personal life  of  the  individual  must  share  in  that 
Being  or  Life ;  and  the  personal  life  of  each  of  us 
must  rest  eternally  back  on  the  one  source  of  all. 


Personalizing  the  Universal  Impersonal. 

The  Famous  "Talking  Horses" 
We  C^n  find  illustrations  of  the  direct  relation- 


Personal  and  Impersonal  Mind  43 

ship  of  the  individual  forms  of  life  and  the  uni- 
versal in  plants,  animals,  and  man.  I  think  how- 
ever that  science  has  never  had  so  startling  a  proof 
of  what  metaphysics  has  long  taught  as  can  be 
found  in  the  trained  horses  of  Elberfeld.  I  con- 
fess that  I  cannot  write  of  them  without  such  a 
thrill  as  one  experiences  only  in  presence  of  a  great 
mystery,  for  though  science  has  admitted  that  these 
horses  actually  do  perform  the  wonders  which  I 
relate,  still  we  must  recall  that  the  back  of  every- 
thing we  know  is  as  great  a  mystery  as  the  face  of 
everything  we  do  not  know. 

The  horses  in  question  were  trained  by  a  man 
named  Krall;  and  the  genuineness  of  their  per- 
formances is  attested  by  an  imposing  list  of  lead- 
ing scientists  of  several  countries.  Various  theories 
have  been  advanced  as  to  the  source  of  the  intelli- 
gence of  these  animals;  but  no  reputable  scientist 
now  questions  the  fact  of  the  intelligence  itself. 
The  facts  are  these:  A  system  of  numbers  is  ar- 
ranged in  such  a  way  that  the  horses  will  know 
that  a  certain  number  of  blows  with  the  foot  will 
represent  each  figure.  For  instance,  following  the 
English  method  of  numbers,  twenty-four  would  be 
represented  first  by  two  blows,  and  then  four.  A 
certain  number  of  blows  also  represents  each  letter 
of  the  alphabet  so  that  the  horse  can  spell  out  any 
word  that  he  may  desire.  With  this  simple  ma- 
chinery of  language  and  without  the  aid  of  a  voice, 
the  horses  perform  prodigies  of  intelligence  that 


44  Being  and  Becoming 

are  more  than  marvelous.  Asked  to  multiply  24 
by  7  for  example,  the  horse  will  strike  out  the  re- 
ply with  instantaneous  quickness  and  apparently 
without  any  conscious  calculation.  The  horses  have 
been  taught  how  to  extract  the  square  root  of  num- 
bers and  can  extract  it  instantly  from  any  number 
that  gives  an  exact  root.  Not  only  this,  but  also 
without  having  been  taught  to  solve  any  number 
beyond  the  square  root  of  144,  the  horses  can  ex- 
tract the  cube  root  of  any  number  and  even  the 
fourth  root. 

When  Maeterlinck  visited  the  stables  at  Elber- 
feld,  he  was  introduced  by  Krall  to  Muhamed,  one 
of  the  horses;  and  the  horse  was  asked  to  spell 
Maeterlinck's  name,  which  he  accomplished  with 
little  difficulty.  To  prove  that  there  was  no  collu- 
sion on  account  of  a  previous  knowledge  of  his 
visit,  Maeterlinck  remained  with  Muhamed  alone 
and  asked  him  to  spell  the  name  of  his  hotel  "Wei- 
denhof."    This  the  animal  did. 

One  day  Zarif  (another  of  the  horses)  suddenly 
stopped  in  the  midst  of  his  lessons.  They  asked 
him  the  reason. 

"Because  I  am  tired." 

Another  time  he  answered :  "Pain  in  my  leg." 

One  day  Krall  and  his  collaborator,  Dr.  Scheller, 
thought  that  they  would  try  to  teach  Muhamed  to 
express  himself  in  speech.  The  horse,  a  docile  and 
eager  pupil,  made  touching  and  fruitless  efforts  to 


Personal  and  Impersonal  Mind  45 

reproduce  human  sounds.  Suddenly  he  stopped; 
and,  in  his  strange  phonetic  spelling,  declared,  by 
striking  his  foot  on  the  spring  board : 

"I  have  not  a  good  voice." 

Observing  that  he  did  not  open  his  mouth,  they 
strove  to  make  him  understand,  by  the  example  of 
a  dog,  with  pictures,  and  so  on,  that,  in  order  to 
speak,  it  is  necessary  to  separate  the  jaws.  They 
next  asked  him : 

"What  must  you  do  to  speak?" 

He  replied  by  striking  with  his  foot: 

"Open  the  mouth." 

"Why  don't  you  open  yours?" 

"Because  I  can't." 

I  thus  quote  directly  from  Maeterlinck's  Un- 
known Guest  because  he  personally  examined  the 
case  of  the  horses  and  because,  after  a  study  of  all 
theories  designed  to  account  for  such  astonishing 
intelligence,  he  comes  to  the  conclusion  that  the 
horses  are  the  instrument  through  which  a  vaster 
intelligence  articulates.  The  theory  of  signs  im- 
perceptible to  the  onlooker  had  to  be  abandoned 
because  one  of  the  horses,  Berto,  is  blind  and  could 
not  detect  such  signs.  Nor  is  it  what  we  call  mental 
telepathy,  for,  as  Maeterlinck  amusingly  relates,  he 
himself  did  not  know  the  answer  to  some  of  the 
problems  he  proposed,  while  examining  the  horse 
alone  in  the  stable,  and  more  than  that  he  never  had 
known,  and  did  not  even  know  where  nor  how  to 


46  Being  and  Becoming 

get  it.  How  then  could  the  horse  read  it  from  his 
mind?  Other  experiments  also  have  been  made 
to  show  that  it  is  not  telepathy. 

By  a  series  of  experiments  and  deductions  into 
which  we  cannot  go  here,  since  space  does  not  per- 
mit, and  which  the  student  or  skeptic  can  examine 
for  himself  to  better  advantage  in  the  book  above 
mentioned,  Maeterlinck  comes  to  the  conclusion 
that  we  can  attribute  the  almost  superhuman  intelli- 
gence of  the  horses  only  to  a  subliminal  conscious- 
ness, which  is  in  touch  with  the  immediate  answer 
to  every  problem.  Like  the  mathematical  prodigies 
of  history  who  have  been  able  to  calculate  numbers 
without  the  aid  of  rules  and  by  some  immediate 
process,  the  horses  seem  to  read  the  answer  from 
some  cosmic  page.  Such  an  explanation  seems  also 
necessary  to  explain  the  quickness  which  they  ex- 
hibit in  learning  words  and  their  meanings,  for  in 
a  few  weeks  they  learn  what  a  child  must  take  a 
long  time  to  acquire  in  the  use  of  language.  Maet- 
erlinck concludes  that  either  we  must  attribute  to 
the  horse  an  intelligence  which  challenges  belief 
as  beyond  that  of  ordinary  human  powers  or  else, 
"we  should  have  to  admit  that  there  is  in  the  horse 
— and  hence  most  probably  in  everything  that  lives 
on  this  earth — a  psychic  power  similar  to  that  which 
is  hidden  beneath'  the  veil  of  our  reason  and  which, 
as  we  learn  to  know  it,  astonishes,  surpasses  and 
dominates  our  reason  more  and  more.  This  psychic 
power,  in  which  no  doubt  we  shall  one  day  be  forced 


Personal  and  Impersonal  Mind  47 

to  recognize  the  genius  of  the  universe  itself,  ap- 
pears, as  we  have  often  observed,  to  be  all-wise,  all- 
seeing,  and  all-powerful.  It  has,  when  it  is  pleased 
to  communicate  with  us  or  when  we  are  allowed 
to  penetrate  into  it,  an  answer  for  every  question 
and  perhaps  a  remedy  for  every  ilL"  2 

I  have  not  quoted  here  in  order  to  establish 
Maeterlinck's  opinion  as  an  authority;  but  I  have 
presented  the  facts  as  he  found  them;  and  the 
reader  can  judge  for  himself.  For  my  part,  I  see 
here  but  another  evidence  of  the  truth  that  there  is 
but  one  Mind  functioning  through  many  individuals, 
expressing  in  many  things,  embodying  in  many 
ideas.  This  is  simply  another  of  those  scientific 
evidences  of  the  principles  of  mental  science  which 
are  daily  coming  to  hand. 

We  see  then  that  the  individualized  conscious-  ) 
ness,  at  the  deeper  points  of  its  current,  mingles  y 
freely  with  the  subterranean  stream  from  which  it 
instinctively  draws  and  by  which  it  is  fed  and  sus- 
tained either  wittingly  or  unwittingly.  The  indi- 
vidualized mind,  forgetful  of  its  origin,  engrossed 
in  the  affairs  and  complications  of  an  objective 
world,  loses  its  consciousness  of  the  all-embracing 
wisdom,  and  seldom  floats  to  the  surface  the  pure 
ideas  from  the  profound  and  placid  depths.  Yet 
there  come  moments  in  life  when  some  storm  smites 
the  surface;  and  we  quiver  to  the  depth  of  our 
being.    It  is  then  that  pure  intuitions  come  to  us; 

aThe  italics  are  mine. 


48  Being  and  Becoming 

and  we  see  with  startling  vision;  we  know  with 
supernatural  clearness;  we  understand  without  the 
processes  of  reason.  Something  rises  up  within  us 
to  take  possession,  leading  us  out  of  peril,  giving 
us  "the  strength  of  madness,"  inspiring  us  to  the 
necessary  action,  acting  as  the  creative  genius  and 
the  ruling  ^spirit  that  masters  every  power  that 
threatens.  And  woe  to  that  man  or  society  that 
stands  in  the  path  of  the  God-inspired  soul,  for  he 
announces  divinity;  and  in  him  God  Himself  is 
marching  onward  to  his  triumph ! 

Individual  Choice  Within  the  Impersonal 
Mind. 

We  are  thus  brought  face  to  face  with  the  great 
mystery,  God  in  man,  or  as  a  great  seer  once  said, 
"Christ  in  you  the  hope  of  glory."  Thus,  by  plung- 
ing beneath  the  surface  of  his  ordinary  conscious- 
ness, man  finds  that  he  does  not  enter  another  sea, 
for  he  finds  no  break  between  the  surface  and  the 
profoundest  depths.^fHe  is  related  to  the  All,  not 
by  proximity  nor  contact,  but  in  actual  nature  and 
being.  Man  does  not  leave  off  where  God  begins. 
If  he  will  but  realize  this  and  seek  to  establish 
relationship  in  conscious  thought,  where  alone  sepa- 
ration of  any  kind  is  possible,  he  cannot  but  feel 
and  know  that  back  of  him  is  the  power  and  the 
life  of  the  All,  and  that  he  is  entitled  to  act  as  the 
personal  factor  within  that  Life.  In  other  words 
as  it  stands  back  of  us  as  the  impersonal  basis  of 


Personal  and  Impersonal  Mind         49 

our  own  life,  it  is  our  right  and  privilege  to  im- 
press upon  it  the  ideas  and  desires  which  our  own 
personal  life  demands.  And  since  it  takes  each 
idea  and  goes  to  work  to  produce  in  visible  form 
the  invisible  thought  which  has  been  given  it,  we 
may  be  sure  that  it  cannot  fail  to  bring  forth  for 
us  whatever  we  may  desire. 

Thus  do  we  have  outlined  for  ourselves  the  prin- 
ciple of  mind.  There  is  one  universal,  all-compre- 
hensive Mind  having  the  power  to  choose  what  it 
shall  create,  and  to  initiate  its  own  ideas,  and  thus  to 
act  as  a  Person  or  Self:  while  at  the  same  time  it 
is  an  impersonal  force  or  creative  energy  building 
for  us  "whatsoever  things  we  ask  in  faith  believ- 
ing." For  as  we  are  in  this  One  Mind  and  our 
own  individuality  arises  from  it,  we  may  make  per- 
sonal choices  of  what  we  shall  have;  and  it  will 
body  them  forth  for  us.  ^ 

One  may  well  rest  back  in  a  sense  of  quiet  secur- 
ity upon  the  assurance  that  these  truths  afford. 
Let  us  say :  I  am  one  with  the  infinite  intelligence ; 
and  the  infinite  energy  is  back  of  every  word  I 
speak  and  every  desire  that  I  voice.  I  may  ask 
what  I  will  in  the  name  of  my  inner  and  real  self ; 
and  it  shall  be  done  unto  me  of  my  Father.  Father, 
I  will  that  thou  shalt  open  to  me  the  storehouses 
of  a  diviner  wisdom  that  I  may  wralk  in  the  path- 
way of  truth  and  learn  more  to  enjoy  the  compan- 
ionstiip  of  the  Ever-Present  One  whom  Thou 
art. 


SO  Being  and  Becoming 

I   am   thy   life   within  thee, 

I  am  thy  health; 
I  am  thy  choicest  treasure; 

I  am  thy  wealth. 
I  am  thy  deepest  wisdom; 

I  am  thy  light ; 
I  am  thy  power  within  thee; 

I  am  thy  might: 
I  am  thy  warm  emotion; 

I  am  thy  truth; 
I  am  thy  ageless  heritage; 

I  am  thy  youth ; 
I  am  thy  hope  of  heaven; 

I  am  the  way; 
I  am  the  light  eternal; 

I  am  the  day: 
I  am  thy  will-to-conquer ; 

I  am  thy  sword; 
I  am  the  peace  thou  cravest ; 

I  am  thy  word. 


I  am  the  Inner  Presence, 

Forever  nigh: — 
Whenever  thou  dost  say,  "I  am," 

/  Am  That  I.3 


3Frora  Songs  of  the  Silence,  by  the  author. 


\ 


CHAPTER   VII. 
THE  PART  "I"  PLAY  IN  COSMIC  MIND. 

THE  farthest  advance  of  God  into  self-expres- 
sion is  in  each  one  of  us.  We  must  learn 
to  realize  the  wonderful  part  we  play  in  the 
great  plan.  You  and  I  are  purposes  of  God,  for 
through  us  He  is  coming  constantly  into  great  ad- 
ventures and  new  experiences.  It  would  not  be 
like  being  a  God  at  all,  unless  every  possible  ex- 
perience could  be  enjoyed  by  Him.  As  the  Abso- 
lute Being  without  individuality,  God  could  not 
have  the  delightful  experiences  we  have  as  indi- 
viduals. For  He  could  not  know  what  it  is  to  love 
without  a  lover;  He  could  not  know  what  it  is  to 
enjoy  the  suspense  of  the  future,  since  in  the  Abso- 
lute there  is  no  sense  of  time;  He  could  not  know 
what  it  is  to  enjoy  a  journey,  since  in  the  Absolute 
there  is  no  space;  He  could  not  carry  out  the  joy 
of  logical  or  inductive  thinking,  since  with  the  Ab- 
solute everything  is  known  at  once.  But  God  would 
not  be  God  unless  He  had  the  ability  to  do  all  of 
these  things  and  have  every  kind  of  experience. 
Thus  He  ventures  forth  as  an  individual,  and  be- 
comes a  self. 

51 


52  Being  and  Becoming 

You  and  I  are  this  self.  Remember  we  are  not 
all  of  God  though  all  that  we  are  is  God.  The 
Absolute  could  not  be  confined  in  the  individual ; 
but  the  individual  may  go  on  expanding  endlessly 
toward  the  Absolute.  If,  then,  we  will  but  realize 
our  relationship  to  God,  we  may  go  on  in  the  sense 
of  a  wonderful  purpose  and  a  marvelous  nature. 
Through  us,  God  is  writing  the  story  of  life; 
through  us,  He  is  the  poet  who  dreams  the  dream 
of  beauty;  through  us,  He  sculptures  the  marble; 
through  us,  He  plans  the  building ;  through  us  hews 
the  stone;  through  us,  He  does  the  commonplace 
work  of  the  world;  through  us,  He  cheers  another 
soul ;  through  us  loves  with  love  surpassing  human 
understanding.  If  mothers  are  not  God  on  earth, 
then  God  is  neither  in  heaven  nor  earth.  Says 
Kipling : 

"If  I  were  damned  of  body  and  soul, 

I  know  whose  prayers  would  make  me  whole, 

Mother  o'  mine,  O  mother  o'  mine!" 

So  God  becomes  conscious  of  Himself  in  various 
moods  of  thinking,  feeling,  and  willing  in  a  way  in 
which  He  could  not  be  conscious  but  for  the  in- 
dividual. And  we  are  therefore  no  longer  to  toler- 
ate any  philosophy  which  teaches  us  to  lose  any 
part  of  the  glorious  experience  of  objective  con- 
sciousness. The  objective  consciousness  is  the  de- 
velopment of  personality  and  the  ability  to  unfold 
>more  finely.     Up  to  the  time  of  the  development 


The  Part  "I"  Play  in  Cosmic  Mind      53 

of  the  self-conscious  individual  God  has  been  ex- 
pressed only  on  the  plane  of  mechanical  law,  with 
all  the  marvels  it  reveals,  in  planetary  systems,  and 
growing  grass  and  living  things.  But  these,  while 
conscious  and  alive  with  intelligence,  have  never  had 
the  ability  to  plan  and  choose  for  themselves.  They 
have  accepted  things  as  they  have  found  them.  We 
do  not  have  to  do  that.  We  can  take  things  as  they 
are  and  then  make  them  what  we  want  them  to  be.  j 
We  can  make  plans  and  start  enterprises.  We  can  i 
distribute  the  finest  emotions  of  God.  We  can  be 
not  only  conscious  of  ourselves,  but  of  all  other 
selves,  and  finally  of  that  Greater  Self  which  God 
is.  We  can  have  personal  relationships  with  that 
Divine  Wonder.  To  believe,  then,  that  it  is  desir- 
able to  push  back  into  the  undifferentiated  flow  of 
life  from  which  we  have  emerged  is  to  do  violence 
to  the  great  purpose  of  Being  which  is  to  become 
manifest  in  higher  and  differentiated  forms. 

Our  Unity  With  the  All-Self. 

At  the  same  time,  the  self  could  not  be  at  all  un- 
less it  rested  back  on  a  common  unit,  the  underly- 
ing absolute  self;  nor  could  we  have  any  sense  of 
relationship  to  these  other  selves,  unless  we  were 
within  an  all-comprehensive  self  that  relates  us. 
We  must  never  lose  sense  of  this  unity  for  it  is  this 
that  gives  our  love  an  all-embracing  charity  so  that 
we  can  look  into  the  faces  of  the  vilest,  and  below 
all  the  scum  or  the  veneer  of  life  may  find  our 


54  Being  and  Becoming 

brother  and  our  sister.  Even  the  wild  creatures  of 
the  plain  will  become  objects  of  respect  and  care 
for  us,  because  they  are  included  in  the  one  mind 
and  in  their  several  ways  are  expressing  a  purpose 
of  God.  Thus  love  and  attention  to  the  needs  of 
animals  is-  a  part  of  every  noble  man's  duty.  | 

Nor  shall  we,  through  the  use  of  terms,  ever  ob- 
scure the  wholeness  of  life  and  the  unity  of  all. 
The  objective  and  subjective  sides  of  mind  will 
then  be  found  to  be  one ;  and  the  former  is  simply 
the  outpush  of  the  latter  into  expression.  Nor 
again  shall  we  essay  to  live  by  the  use  of  the  will, 
the  rationalizing  powers,  the  inductions  of  the  ob- 
jective mind  alone,  but  rather  learn  to  lean  on  the 
source  and  strength  of  the  inner  life  to  which  we 
are  eternally  related. 

There  is,  then,  no  "mortal  mind  and  divine  mind." 
There  is  but  one  mind.  The  intellectualizing  mind 
may  have  chosen  wrongly;  but  it  is  not  another 
alien  mind.  So  to  consider  is  to  introduce  another 
form  of  dualism.  Sin  and  evil  and  sickness  are 
due  to  a  sense  of  separation,  not  to  "mortal  mind." 
They  are  due  to  a  failure  to  recognize  or  employ 
the  whole  power  that  lies  back  of  us  or  to  partial 
knowledge.  In  other  words,  we  find  that  all  we 
call  ill,  is  due  to  some  form  of  partialness ;  and, 
when  we  once  more  restore  the  consciousness  of 
wholeness,  we  shall  do  away  with  the  so-called 
evil. 

Being  is  always  perfect:  it  is  only  in  becoming 


The  Part  "I"  Play  in  Cosmic  Mind      55 

that  the  apparent  imperfection  is  manifest.  Im- 
perfection has  its  beginning,  not  in  Being  or  First 
Cause,  but  in  the  mould  of  thought.  As  the  indi- 
vidual rises  into  the  consciousness  of  self,  with 
the  powers  of  conscious  selection,  he  may  think  in 
either  direction,  forward  or  back.  Just  because  he 
is  to  enjoy  the  fun  of  assembling  the  parts  into  the 
unity,  he  has  within  himself  the  power  to  combine 
the  factors  in  the  wrong  way  or  to  leave  some  out. 
When  he  does  that  trouble  results.  Then  he  will 
have  pain  to  set  him  back  on  the  track  and  push 
him  on  again. 

Let  us  therefore  constantly  keep  in  mind  the 
essential  nature  of  the  One  Being  and  our  own 
relationship  to-  it  and  have  no  fear  of  any  issue  or 
problem.    We  are  founded  on  the  Rock  of  Ages. 

Related  as  we  are  to  the  Eternal,  All-Powerful, 
Creative  Mind,  we  must  realize  that  for  us  to  choose 
is  for  it  to  choose,  since  it  has  become  us  for  that 
purpose.  Yet  because  it  has  given  us  individuality 
to  choose  what  we  will,  it  must  also  make  for  us 
or  create  for  us  the  thing  that  we  choose;  or  else 
we  would  not  have  any  true  choice.  Then  because 
we  choose  unwisely  or  without  knowledge  of  all 
the  factors  in  the  case,  let  us  not  despair  nor  blame 
God.  The  only  evil  is  incompleteness.  And  that 
is  not  an  evil.  For  the  evil  entirely  disappears 
when  we  learn  the  whole  truth  and  then  employ  it. 

And  this  ought  to  explain  to»  us  how  there  can 
be  the  experience  of  evil  and  yet  no  moral  fault 


56  Being  and  Becoming 

in  God.  As  Absolute  Self,  He  does  not  experience 
evil,  because  He  never  has  any  sense  of  partialness. 
His  is  always  a  sense  of  wholeness.  All  the  fac- 
tors are  known  to  Him ;  and  He  never  thinks  in 
terms  of  the  relative.  And  so,  since  God  could 
not  be  all  without  sharing  every  human  experience, 
still  the  suffering  is  only  in  the  individual;  it  is 
not  in  God  as  a  consuming  experience,  for  in  the 
Absolute  Self  there  is  never  any  partial  choice. 
God  chooses  with  every  factor  known.  Pain,  then, 
might  lie  in  the  order  of  the  eternally  possible,  or 
else  we  could  not  experience  it;  yet  it  never  gets 
hold  of  God  for  in  Him  it  is  ever  transcended  by 
complete  knowledge  and  perfect  choice. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

MAN'S  GREATER  BODY  AND  THE 
FEELING-LIFE. 

WE  have  now  shown  that  the  whole  round 
circle  of  being  and  its  manifestation  from 
star  to  farthest  star  and  beyond  is  Mind. 
Everything  originates  in  Mind;  all  things  are 
thoughts ;  all  form  is  idea ;  all  substance  is  mental. 
Even  what  we  call  spiritual  things  can  be  but 
thought  in  finer  form ;  and  spiritual  men  and  women 
are  those  whose  thoughts  are  purest,  finest,  and 
most  godlike.  Love  itself  is  the  unified  conscious- 
ness; and  its  emotions  are  the  distilled  essence  of 
higher  thinking.  Herein  is  God  made  manifest  as 
one,  for  we  cannot  conceive  of  anything  apart  from 
Mind;  and  there  is  no  place  outside  of  that  Mind. 
Yet  for  the  purposes  of  clearness,  we  may  have 
other  names  for  God  and  other  words  for  that 
which  goes  on  in  Mind.  Original  Feeling  is  a  name 
which  we  may  give  to  First  Cause  because  God  be- 
comes manifest  through  the  impulses  of  feeling- 
life.  This  term  indicates  the  depth  of  thought; 
it  is  not  merely  the  idle  floating  of  imagination  out 
into  space  but  the  rich  conviction  of  a  purpose. 

57 


58  Being  and  Becoming 

Thus,  feeling  may  be  called  in  general  the  creative 
quality  in  God  and  so  in  man.  Again,  we  may  note 
that  certain  types  of  thought  tend  to  group  them- 
selves to  form  a  particular  attribute  of  mind.  Low 
vibrations  of  thought  become  inorganic  matter  and 
take  form  as  such.  Higher  vibrations  become  cell 
life  and  tissues  and  act  harmoniously  together  as 
organic  laws  of  physiology  and  biology. 

Finer  thought  forces  assemble  themselves  around 
a  common  center  and  form  what  we  may  call  the 
feeling-body.  This  is  that  expression  of  the  self 
which  is  distinctly  personal  but  not  obvious  as  is 
the  physical  body.  As  the  substance  is  still  thought, 
the  expression  is  vibration;  and  as  there  must  be 
form  wherever  there  is  vibration,  the  "feeling- 
body"  must  have  form  and  occupy  space  in  some 
way.  Can  we  really  find  the  presence  of  such  a 
feeling-body  of  each  of  us;  and,  if  so,  what  is  its 
extent,  nature,  and  purpose? 

Because  we  are  so  accustomed  to  judge  our  uni- 
verse from  the  standpoint  of  what  we  can  see, 
touch,  and  measure  with  physical  instruments,  it 
is  hard  for  us  to  realize  how  much  of  the  objec- 
tive world  itself  is  invisible  to  us.  Yet  we  are  sur- 
rounded by  innumerable  forms  of  life  and  "mat- 
ter" which  we  cannot  cognize  by  the  ordinary 
senses.  Says  Flammarion,  "Between  the  last  acous- 
tic sensation  perceived  by  our  ears  and  due  to  36,850 
vibrations  per  second  and  the  first  optical  sensa- 
tion perceived  by  our  eye  which  is  due  to  four  hun- 


Man's  Greater  Body  59 

dred  trillion  vibrations  per  second,  we  perceive 
nothing.  There  is  an  enormous  interval  to  which 
no  one  of  our  senses  brings  us  into  relation."  1 

We  see,  then,  that  forms  can  and  do  undoubt- 
edly exist  around  us  of  which  we  are  not  at  all 
conscious.  And,  as  there  are  those  whose  powers 
of  sight  transcend  the  physical  instrument  of  the 
eye,  we  might  expect  that  such  forms  would  be  fre- 
quently detected.  Such  indeed  is  the  case;  and 
throughout  the  ages,  people  who  have  often  been 
called  clairvoyant,  that  is,  able  to  see  without  the 
eye,  have  declared  that  they  could  see  a  more  subtle 
body  surrounding  other  individuals.  This  body  has 
sometimes  been  called  the  aura,  and  has  been  rep- 
resented in  art  by  the  halo  which  surrounds  the 
heads  of  saints.  In  the  case  of  Spanish  art,  it  is 
usually  triangular.  In  other  art,  it  is  oval  or  repre- 
sented by  the  halo  about  the  head.  In  recent  times, 
science  has  made  it  possible  for  any  one  who  wishes 
to  investigate  these  phenomena  to  do-  so,  especially 
by  the  use  of  photographic  plates.  For  it  is  quite 
possible  now  to  photograph  the  fine  vibration  or 
odic  fluid  that  radiates  from  all  of  us.  Says  Maeter- 
linck, "Reichenbach  was  first  to  discover  that 
'sensitive'  persons  could  see  the  effluvia  in  the  dark. 
After  experiments,  he  proved  that  its  power  varied 
with  the  emotions  and  status  of  mind  of  the  sub- 
jects. He  found  that  it  was  of  bluish  color  on 
the  right  side,  and  yellowish  on  the  left." 


xThe   Unknown,  page   11. 


60  Being  and  Becoming 

The  power  of  this  fluid,  then,  "varies  with  the 
emotions  and  status  of  mind  of  the  subject."  This 
we  would  know  from  the  fact  that  everything  has 
its  origin  in  mind;  and  that  this  feeling-body  is 
simply  the  form  in  which  the  higher  consciousness 
of  the  individual  clothes  itself.  And  we  may  add  to 
this  the  fact  that  this  feeling-body  is  also  affected 
profoundly  by  the  thoughts  and  acts  of  other  peo- 
ple. For  example,  a  very  sensitive  person  was 
asked  by  the  experimenter  to  put  his  hand  in  a 
glass  of  water.  He  did  so  and  was  then  removed 
to  another  part  of  the  room.  A  pin  was  thrust  into 
the  water;  and  he  not  only  was  conscious  of  it  but 
winced  with  the  pain  as  much  as  though  the  pin 
had  been  thrust  into  his  physical  body. 

In  another  case,  a  photographic  plate  was  placed 
within  the  radiations  of  the  odic  fluid  emanating 
from  a  subject,  and  scratches  were  made  on  the 
hands  in  the  photograph.  The  subject  at  once  burst 
into  tears ;  and  the  scratches  were  plainly  to  be  seen 
on  his  own  hands.2 

That  the  feeling-life  is  not  confined  to  the  phy- 
sical body  as  we  ordinarily  see  it  can  be  demon- 
strated in  a  simpler  experiment.  Many  sensitive 
persons  will  show  pain  if  a  pin  be  thrust  into  the 
confluence  of  wave  vibrations  from  the  body,  at 

2It  is  not  my  purpose  here  to  discuss  the  question  as  to  how 
many  bodies  an  individual  might  have,  that  is,  the  different  types 
of  vibration;  but  only  to  show  the  extent  to  which  the  feeling-life 
manifests  in  our  experience.  Therefore  no  distinction  is  attempted 
between  aura,  odic  fluid,  etc. 


Man's  Greater  Body  61 

one-half  an  inch  or  an  inch-and-a-half  beyond  the 
surface. 

My  purpose,  in  these  illustrations  which  might 
easily  be  extended,  is  to  show  a  primary  fact  of 
mental  science,  that  intelligence,  mind,  thought,  and 
therefore  feeling  are  not  confined  to  physical  or- 
gans in  the  ordinary  sense.  It  is  quite  possible,  in- 
deed, that  our  future  investigations  will  persuade 
us  that  the  ego-self  functions  through  still  finer 
instruments  than  any  we  have  as  yet  detected  and 
is  not  at  all  confined  to  immediate  environment; 
but  for  the  present  this  will  lead  us  far  enough. 
We  are  housed  in  a  wonderful  body,  very  sensi- 
tively adjusted  to  our  environment.  This  body, 
both  within  the  "physical  frame"  and  in  the  more 
subtle  exterior,  is  charged  with  an  emotional  or 
feeling  consciousness.  This  consciousness  is  in  gen- 
eral independent  of  the  physical  structure  and  nerve- 
centers.  It  uses  them;  it  acts  upon  them  and  re- 
acts to  them;  but  still  it  is  independent  of  them. 
It  is  possible  to  see  without  eyes  and  hear  without 
ears,  and  feel  without  physical  contacts. 

Two  other  characteristics  of  this  feeling-con- 
sciousness should  be  mentioned.  First,  it  is  the 
medium  through  which  the  conscious  mind  acts 
upon  the  physical  structure.  It  lies,  as  it  were,  be- 
tween the  conscious  or  objective  mind  and  the  phys- 
ical body  and  environment.  Whatever  we  desire 
to  accomplish  on  the  physical  plane  must  be  accom- 


/ 


62  Being  and  Becoming 

plished  through  it.    We  give  our  instructions  to  it ; 
and  it  carries  them  out. 

Second,  the  feeling-consciousness  is  impersonal. 
It  does  not  initiate  any  movement  in  the  body  or 
in  the  thought.  It  takes  any  impression  given  it 
and  reports  it  or  causes  the  body  to  react  to  it. 
If  the  hand  of  the  subject  is  scratched  on  the  photo- 
graphic plate,  this  consciousness  feels  it  and  records 
it  in  the  body  and  in  the  mind.  It  varies,  as 
Maeterlinck  has  told  us,  with  the  emotions  and 
status  of  the  individual  concerned.  We  thus  have 
confirmed  again  that  it  is  simply  a  form  of  the 
creative  activity  of  mind  and  is  really  the  mind 
functioning  impersonally. 

The  Feeling-Life  Affected  by  Thought. 

We  are  now  ready  to  see  how  this  intermediary 
agent  operates  in  regard  to  the  affairs  of  our  lives 
and  the  very  destiny  of  our  souls.  We  have  found 
that  the  feeling-body  or  consciousness  is  very  sus- 
ceptible to  mental  influence  of  any  kind.  It  is  open 
to  thought  coming  from  any  direction,  from  either 
without  or  within.  These  thoughts  fall  as  seed 
upon  fertile  soil;  and,  as  this  consciousness  has  no 
will  of  its  own  but  only  an  instinct  to  create,  it  be- 
gins to  take  any  thought  and  work  upon  it. 
Throughout  our  lives,  seed  continues  to  fall;  and 
the  person  who  is  unconscious  of  these  laws  is 
always  open  to  unseen  and  unknown  influences  from 
without.    How  quickly  we  catch  the  contagion  of 


Man's  Greater  Body  63 

fear  around  us!  How  strangely  we  react  to  an- 
other's mood.  How  open  we  are  to  impressions; 
and  how  often  we  are  swept  off  the  feet  of  our 
better  judgment  by  some  strong  mind!  How  fre- 
quently we  become  downcast  without  apparent 
cause  and  then  rise  to  an  unexpected  buoyancy  of 
spirit!  Some  one  says,  "You  do  not  look  well;" 
and  at  once  we  begin  to  feel  our  pulse.  Another 
says,  "Times  are  going  to  be  hard;"  and  we  begin 
to  feel  the  pinch  of  those  times.  Worst  of  all,  we 
are  all  open  to  vagrant  thoughts  and  ideas  which 
are  always  flying  about,  for  a  thought  is  a  vibration 
and  goes  on  its  f rictionless  way  through  the  ethers. 
These  thoughts,  as  though  they  were  angels,  come 
to  the  heart  that  is  like  them;  or,  like  devils,  they 
flock  to  the  place  where  they  feel  most  at  home. 
Thus  the  sins  of  our  fathers  are  visited  upon  us, 
if  we  let  them  visit — and  most  of  us  keep  a  spare 
chamber.  Especially  are  we  open  to  the  invasion 
of  thoughts  directed  purposely  at  us.  There  are 
those  who  envy  and  those  who  oppose  our  plans 
and  purposes.  Often  they  do  not  consciously  wish 
us  harm ;  but  they  are  thinking  such  thoughts  about 
us  as  are  not  for  our  best  good.  If  we  are  un- 
guarded, these  thoughts  come  to  us,  find  entrance 
through  the  impersonal,  neutral  consciousness  and 
make  their  impression  upon  it.  Being  impersonal 
and  creative,  this  consciousness  registers  on  our 
bodies  as  disease;  on  our  conditions,  as  failure; 
on  our  minds,  as  depression.    So  if  one  were  really 


64  Being  and  Becoming 

hostile  to  us,  he  might  deliberately  practice  "black 
magic/'  which  is  by  no  means  out  of  fashion.  In 
that  case,  his  thought  would  gather  up  all  the  forces 
of  negative  thought  which  were  not  consciously 
directed  at  us;  and  one  hostile  mind  could  then 
lead  an  army  of  inimical  forces  against  us. 

Protection  Against  Malicious  Suggestion  by 
Conscious  Thought. 

On  the  other  hand,  our  protection  is  quite  ade- 
quate.     We  must   remember  that  no   physical  or^ 
mental  reaction  is  possible  except  through  the  con- 
sciousness.    If,  then,  we  allow  hostile  impressions/ 
or  suggestions  to  be  made  upon  it,  then  disaster^ 
will  follow.     If,  on  the  other  hand,  we  insist  that" 
no  influence  shall  affect  us  except  by  our  own  con^ 
scious  choice,  then  the  consciousness  will  not  pick/ 
up  the  flying  thought.     We  are  like  the  wireless^ 
telegraph  instrument,  we  record  only  those  mes-^ 
sages  to  which  our  instrument  is  attuned.     A  fulK 
protection  is  thus  assured  against  the  most  mali- 
cious influence  by  the  simple  expedient  of  declar- 
ing that  you  will  not  receive  such  thoughts  from 
any  direction.    It  is  even  a  good  plan  in  sojne  cases 
to  ridicule  the  power  of  such  thoughts  in  cases 
where  you  feel  that  mental  pressure  is  being  brought 
to  bear  upon  you.    Judge  Troward  says,  "Look  it 
mentally  in  the  face  and  say,  'Cock-a-doodle-doo !' " 
And  that  is   not  bad  advice.     Every  one   should 
occasionally  think  of  himself  as  surrounded  by  an 


Man's  Greater  Body  65 

impenetrable  barrier  which  no  negative  thought  can 
enter.  We  are  moving  through  a  world  more  subtle 
than  we  have  supposed;  and  we  may  as  well  cog- 
nize the  unseen  forces  of  evil  long  enough — and  no 
longer — to  declare  our  protection  against  them.  "No 
evil  shall  befall  me,  because  I  have  made  the  Most 
High  my  habitation." 

We  are  frequently  in  the  presence  of  strong-  i 
minded  people  who  without  meaning  to  use  bad 
mental  influences,  still  desire  us  to  do  their  will 
or  accept  their  dictum.  They  not  only  cause  their 
thought  to  impinge  on  our  sensitive  consciousness 
to  act  as  suggestion ;  but  a  real  force  goes  out  from 
them.  The  odic  fluid  of  which  we  have  previously 
spoken  is  a  subtle  form  of  force  which  probably 
emanates  from  large  numbers  of  individuals  and 
strikes  directly  upon  the  organism  unless  we  pro- 
tect ourselves.  This  force  can  be  photographed. 
It  is  strong  enough  to  cause  a  lever  to  tip,  a  copper 
needle  to  vibrate,  or  to  set  a  clock  in  motion  within 
a  sealed  glass  vessel.  It  is  powerful  enough  to 
move  a  table  weighing  two  hundred  pounds,  and 
to  magnetize  minerals.  Many  healers  send  it  forth 
in  the  treatment  of  patients,  usually  draining  their 
own  forces  in  using  it.  I  have  treated  healers  who 
felt  this  influence  go  forth  from  them  in  waves.  I 
have  known  of  others  who  in  healing  send  off  this 
current  in  an  encircling  motion,  going  out  to  the 
patient  and  returning  again. 

One  can  imagine  with  what  energy  such  a  force 


66  Being  and  Becoming 

impinges  directly  upon  the  organism  of  those  to- 
ward whom  it  is  directed.  This  probably  explains 
those  cases  of  remarkable  personal  magnetism  with 
which  history  deals,  Julius  Caesar,  Napoleon,  Wash- 
ington, and  many  of  our  great  pioneers.  Whole 
atmospheres  are  charged  with  this  psychic  energy; 
and  places  are  affected  by  the  presence  of  one 
powerful  individual. 

It  seems  to  me,  therefore,  that  one  should  occa- 
sionally examine  his  own  consciousness  to  see  how 
much  it  is  affected  by  the  opinions,  prejudices,  will, 
and  oppositions  of  others,  and  counteract  any  such 
influences  by  the  quiet  direction  of  his  own  forces. 
In  the  case  of  cancer  and  some  other  diseases,  ad- 
vanced physicians  to-day  are  using  powerful  electric 
waves  to  drive  back  the  vibrations  which  stream 
in  vivid  colors  from  the  affected  organ.  Shall  we 
do-  less  in  protecting  ourselves  against  those  at- 
tacks of  personal  magnetism  which,  either  con- 
sciously or  unconsciously,  are  directed  against  us? 
And  if  we  can  do  it  in  no  other  way,  we  should 
certainly  avoid  contact  with  those  whose  dominat- 
ing mind  overpowers  our  own  will  and  causes  us 
to  move  about  as  puppets  at  the  bid  and  call  of  their 
desires.  This  is  particularly  true  in  the  case  of 
those  who  claim  to  be  the  directors  of  our  religious 
destiny  and  to  know  the  only  way  by  which  our 
souls  can  climb  into  heaven.  The  religious  say-so, 
the  "only-my-way-to-heaven"  doctrine  is  but  an- 
other way  to  beat  down  and  imprison  the  splendid 


Man's  Greater  Body  67 

freedom  of  the  soul.  So  anywhere  and  everywhere 
that  men  would  enslave  us  we  must  rise  up  and 
declare  the  immortal  heritage  of  our  birth,  our  will 
to  zvill  our  own  good.  "Sir,"  we  may  say,  "I  pre- 
fer my  hell  to  your  heaven,  if  the  choice  is  not  to 
be  my  own."  Let  no  man  enslave  your  soul !  Thus 
does  each  one  of  us  choose  the  pathway  of  his 
destiny. 


CHAPTER    IX. 

THE  EMOTIONAL  SELF  AND  THE  CAUSES 
OF  DISEASE. 

WE  have  seen  that  the  body  which  we  call 
physical  is  only  a  part  of  man's  organism. 
There  is  around  and  within  each  one  of 
us  an  area  of  vibration  which  is  definitely  asso- 
ciated with  the  body,  which  transmits  and  receives 
influences,  not  by  physical  contacts  alone  but  also 
by  the  more  subtle  agency  of  thought  and  feeling. 
This  greater  body  has  form  because  it  is  definite 
enough  to  occupy  space ;  and  yet  the  form  is  doubt- 
less continuously  changing  and  altering.  The  whole 
organism,  which  includes  this,  is  conscious,  that  is, 
it  has  intelligence,  is  open  to  the  impressions  which 
are  constantly  being  made  upon  it,  and  faithfully 
reports  them  to  the  self.  At  the  same  time,  we  must 
remember  that  this  consciousness  is  the  impersonal 
activity  of  mind ;  it  does  not  think  as  "I,"  the  ego, 
think;  it  does  not  have  ideas.  //  takes  them.  It 
takes  them  from  me;  or  it  takes  them  from  with- 
out, unless  I  tell  it  not  to.  It  is  thus  a  great  bless- 
ing or  a  great  curse  to  man  that  he  has  this  neutral 
field  of  consciousness.     If  he  controls  the  images 

68 


The  Emotional  Self  69 

that  it  receives,  if  he  consciously  directs  his  life, 
if  he  prohibits  the  invasion  of  false  thoughts  and 
suggestions  he  has  reason  to  be  grateful  for  the  neu- 
tral activity  of  mind,  for  it  is  his  silent  partner,  his 
willing  worker  who  takes  his  orders  and  continues 
to  build  the  body  and  to  care  for  the  whole  organ- 
ism without  any  great  amount  of  thought  on  the 
part  of  the  conscious  self.  If,  on  the  other  hand, 
you  and  I  are  ignorant  or  careless  of  the  influences 
which  surround  and  affect  us,  we  are  continuously 
open  to  the  invasion  of  disease,  unhappiness,  pov- 
erty and  all  the  brood  of  negative  thought-devils. 
For  the  neutral  consciousness  takes  the  impression 
that  is  given  to  it  and  passes  it  on  as  the  working 
model  of  the  cell-life;  and  each  cell  takes  the  archi- 
tect's plans  and  begins  to  build  accordingly.  This 
is  the  way  in  which  contagious  diseases  get  their 
innings.  The  individual  is  not  always  consciously 
thinking  of  or  fearing  the  disease;  but  his  con- 
sciousness is  open  to  the  inroads  of  any  thought 
that  may  come  blowing  along  on  the  winds  of  fate. 
For  him  who  lives  by  conscious  choices,  life  is 
therefore  destiny;  for  him  who  lives  by  chance, 
life  is  fate. 

All  persons  vary  in  the  degree  with  which  the 
creative  or  feeling  consciousness  is  affected  by 
ideas  and  influences.  Some  people  are  very  sensi- 
tive and  are  open  to  the  slightest  impression.  To 
be  sensitive  is  simply  to  leave  the  field  of  the  feel- 
ing-consciousness unguarded  and  to  allow  others  to 


70  Being  and  Becoming 

sow  the  fatal  seeds  of  their  thoughts  and  opinions 
upon  the  rich  soil  within.  Then  we  experience  it 
as  pain;  or,  as  we  often  say,  "My  feelings  are 
hurt."  And  as  each  emotion  seeks  an  outlet  at 
the  weakest  point,  these  feelings  make  their  im- 
press upon  the  flesh  in  all  forms  of  disorder. 

Diseases  in  women  can  be  largely  traced  to  the 
reactions  of  the  emotional  life.  From  the  fact  that 
their  love  nature  is  more  tender  and  gentle  than 
that  of  men,  and  that  they  do  not  have  the  excite- 
ment of  continuous  change  in  the  work  of  the  day 
which  falls  to  the  lot  of  the  average  workingman, 
women  allow  the  inharmony  of  things  to  make  a 
deeper  impression  upon  them.  Any  thought  brooded 
upon  holds  it  in  consciousness ;  and,  as  creative 
mind  and  its  physical  agent  continue  to  act  upon 
each  thought  so  long  as  it  is  held,  the  result  is 
often  fatal  to  happiness  and  health.  Thus  even 
words  that  are  not  meant  to  contain  a  sting  are 
held  to  the  bosom  like  the  poisonous  asp  until  peace 
and  love  are  stung  to  death.  The  husband  goes  to 
his  work  and  forgets  his  hasty  words  before  night- 
fall calls  him  again  to  his  home;  but  the  wife  does 
not  forget.  The  thought  goes  on  rankling  in  her 
breast  until  its  inevitable  end  in  some  form  of  nerv- 
ous or  physical  disorder.  Says  Edward  Rowland  Sill : 

"These  clumsy  feet  still  in  the  mire 
Go  crushing  blossoms  without  end : 

These  hard,  well-meaning  hands  we  thrust 
Among  the  heart-strings  of  a  friend. 


The  Emotional  Self  71 

The  ill-timed  truth  we  might  have  kept — 
Who  knows  how  sharp  it  pierced  and  stung! 

The  word  we  had  not  sense  to  say, 
Who  knows  how  grandly  it  had  rung!" 

Sometimes  I  think  that  unintentional  hurts  are 
more  cruel  than  those  that  are  given  in  some  burst 
of  anger  because  to  be  thoughtless  along  some  lines 
is  an  indication  that  we  have  not  cared  enough  to 
think  how  it  will  affect  the  other.  Then  the  other 
cannot  but  feel  that  we  have  not  been  true  to  love ; 
and  nothing  hurts  like  neglect.  Without  love  there 
is  nothing;  and  love  languishes  on  neglect  and 
thoughtlessness.  A  white-hot  iron  across  the 
breast  will  not  so  mar  the  body  as  the  word  and  act 
that  burns  its  way  into  the  soul  of  those  who  had 
reason  to  expect  better. 

Few  men  or  women  would  think  of  plunging  a 
dagger  into  another's  flesh;  and  yet  they  use  the 
tongue  which  is  a  two-edged  sword  and  turn  it 
within  the  wound.  It  pierces  the  vital  atmosphere 
of  the  emotional  life  and  makes  its  mark  upon  the 
creative  consciousness  within.  Thus  both  soul  and 
body  are  plunged  into  hell. 

The  day  will  come  when  we  shall  put  a  heavy 
fine  upon  the  man  or  woman  who  predicts  disaster 
and  disease,  and  utters  croaking  forecasts  of  com- 
ing evil,  for  he  is  cursing  the  race.  Yet  to-day  we 
turn  the  pages  of  our  newspapers  and  read  of  those 
who  prognosticate  the  return  of  some  dreadful 
scourge,  or  some  great  cataclysm  of  nature,  and 


72  Being  and  Becoming 

then  lay  out  the  tools  of  their  industry  ready  to 
reap  the  harvest  which  their  foul  seed  has  caused 
to  spring  up.  Direful  forecasts,  pratings  of  so- 
called  evil  times,  fault-finding,  pessimistic  utter- 
ances, slander,  gossip  of  a  malicious  character — all 
these  are  the  spawn  and  the  incubus  of  disease,  want 
and  misery,  for  they  fall  on  the  fertile  and  produc- 
tive soil  of  the  race-consciousness  and,  entering  any 
door  that  swings  upon  unsuspecting  hinges,  they 
make  their  abode  within  the  body.  Here,  like  a 
serpent,  they  coil  for  the  spring,  like  its  bite,  they 
fester  in  the  flesh.  Whole  peoples  have  been  ex- 
tinguished by  the  false  gods  of  the  national  ideals 
and  ideas,  for  "thought  is  father  to  the  act;"  and 
ideas,  making  their  impress  upon  the  creative  mind 
of  the  individual,  the  race,  and  the  cosmic  con- 
sciousness alike  bring  forth  the  dread  cancer  that 
burns  out  the  life  of  the  nation. 

Our  Tendency  to  Yield  to  Suggestions  of 
Disaster. 

How  invidious  are  the  temptations  of  our  life 
when  the  very  individual  who  reads  this  may  ex- 
claim, "Yes,  that  is  so.  See  what  I  have  suffered 
from  the  tongue  and  acts  of  others.  They  have 
brought  it  upon  me!"  This  is  perhaps  a  natural 
thought  but  a  very  dangerous  one,  for  if  it  be  true 
that  we  must  accept  these  things  we  are  bound  to 
the  chariot  wheel  of  the  most  vulgar  thinker  among 
us.    This  is  incredible.    We  are  children  of  choice. 


The  Emotional  Self  73 

We  are  rulers  of  this  organism  by  right  of  that 
divine  freedom  within  us  which  determines  what 
thoughts  and  impressions  shall  be  admitted  to  con- 
sciousness. The  conscious  self  is  the  gatekeeper 
in  the  house  of  the  lord  of  our  life  and  can  chal- 
lenge all  comers.  "Who  are  you?  What  is  your 
purpose  ?  Do  you  bode  ill  or  good  ?  Do  you  seek 
to  enslave  me  or  to  serve  me?" 

For  we  must  realize  that  the  feeling-life  is  not 
objective  but  subjective.  It  is  that  which  we  dis- 
cern as  the  greater  body  of  the  individual  and 
is  primarily  controlled  by  his  mind.  While,  there- 
fore, we  are  to  guard  against  unconscious  control 
of  our  lives  and  fate  from  without,  we  are  not  to 
lose  sight  of  the  fact  that  we  of  ourselves  are  con- 
stantly initiating  the  causes  which  bring  disease  and 
unhappiness  upon  us. 

Emotions  That  Poison. 

That  intense  emotions  do  create  physical  reac- 
tions with  startling  suddenness  is  shown  in  the  case 
of  those  investigations  which  have  been  made  in 
examining  the  blood  of  people  under  the  stress  of 
excitement  of  one  kind  or  another.  It  is  found 
that  the  normal  secretions  of  the  body  do  not  take 
place  but  in  their  stead  frequently  some  kind  of 
poison  is  distilled  by  the  overwrought  cells  and 
glands.  Fear,  anger,  jealousy,  hate,  and  so  on, 
each  produce  some  form  of  substance  poisonous 
to  the  system..    A  mother  in  fear  or  hate  has  been 


74  Being  and  Becoming 

known  to  poison  the  milk  of  her  babe.  Under 
stress  of  worry,  the  stomach  will  often  turn  the 
gastric  juice  to  acid.  An  extreme  of  the  reaction 
of  feeling  upon  the  physical  organs  came  to  my 
attention  in  the  case  of  a  woman  who  lost  her  sight 
because  she  vehemently  declared  that  she  wished 
she  might  never  see  her  husband's  face  again.  She 
was  afterwards  healed  through  the  science  of 
mind. 

Cases  of  quite  frequent  occurrence  have  been 
recorded  during  the  centuries  wherein  religious 
zealots  through  strong  feeling  have  re-lived  the  life 
and  suffering  of  Jesus  to  the  extent  that  they  have 
caused  the  mars  and  scars  of  his  hands,  feet  and 
side,  to  be  reproduced  on  their  own. 

The  Pains  of  Love. 

Love  that  is  unrequited  or  that  is  constantly  vio- 
lated in  its  finer  instincts  has  a  power  of  reacting 
on  the  system  with  terrible  force.  A  sort  of  stifling 
takes  place  throughout  the  whole  body.  Shrinking 
of  the  nerve  cells,  and  a  kind  of  congestion  is  felt ; 
and  a  "soul-sickness"  lays  hold  of  one.  When  love 
is  hurt,  feeling  itself  seems  ready  to  die;  and  the 
whole  body  and  mind  is  plunged  into  a  distraught 
condition.  The  heart  cries  out  against  it,  and 
against  the  fate  which  love,  more  cruel  than  hate, 
has  prepared  for  the  tortured  soul.  Here  is  where 
the  ministry  of  truth  alone  can  soothe  the  broken 
heart  and  restore  lost  confidence  and  hope.    It  is 


The  Emotional  Self  75 

a  vast  issue,   for  life  is  pitted  against  death,  and 
faith  against  bitter  loss. 

At  first  one  should  seek  some  change  of  interest. 
Anything  that  will  alter  the  thought  life  should  be 
sought.  Service  to  others  in  hard  straits  of  life 
will  often  beguile  a  mind  fastened  on  sorrow.  Sym- 
pathy for  those  who  need  our  help  will  do  much. 
But  for  those  who  know  the  law  more  vigorous 
measures  are  also  desirable.  One  may  as  well  face 
the  fact  at  once.  There  is  nothing  comes  to  us  but 
something  in  us  brings  it.  We  may  not  have  con- 
sciously brought  it ;  but  here  it  is.  Is  the  one  from 
whom  we  have  received  the  all  but  mortal  hurt 
really  our  mate?  If  not,  then  it  is  best  that  things 
should  end  between  us.  If  so,  then  time  or  tide 
cannot  keep  us  forever  apart.  The  boundless 
reaches  of  time  are  vast  enough  to  work  out  every 
plan  and  purpose ;  and  no  heart  but  sometime  will 
find  its  life  complete.  Firmly  recognize  that  only 
ourselves  keep  our  good  from  us  and  only  ourselves 
draw  our  good  to  us ;  and  we  are  ready  to  act.  Then 
boldly  lay  claim  on  the  law  for  the  best  that  life 
can  give.  When  the  perfect  concept  is  formulated, 
hold  to  it  throughout  every  vicissitude  of  changing 
times  and  at  last  the  power  of  creative  thought 
through  conscious  choice  will  draw  to  us  love's  best 
though  now  it  seems  to  lie  beyond  the  grave.1 

Some  day  the  clouds  shall  lift 

And  I  shall  see  God's  face  there  in  the  rift 


*Jor  the  healing  power  of  love,  see  Chapter  XVII, 


76  Being  and  Becoming 

Psychic  Disease. 

We  have  thus  seen  that  what  we  frequently  call 
the  psychic  nature  opens  us  to  the  invasion  of  health 
or  disease,  foi"  the  same  feeling-life  that  takes  the 
imprint  and  contagion  of  disease  is  also  open  to 
the  contagion  of  good  health  and  well-being.  In 
our  practice  as  healers,  too,  we  shall  frequently 
discover  that  the  patient  is  not  suffering  from  the 
actual  presence  of  physical  disorders  as  in  the  case 
of  cancer,  tuberculosis,  anemia,  and  so  on,  but  is 
suffering  from  what  is  as  yet  only  the  psychic  coun- 
terpart. In  other  words,  the  feeling-life  is  dis- 
tressed ;  and  the  organ  that  is  affected  is  only  vibrat- 
ing to  the  inharmony  of  the  consciousness  resident 
within  it.  In  such  cases,  we  can  often  effect  an 
immediate  cure  through  the  removal  of  the  thought 
cause.  This  would  be  an  instantaneous  cure. 
Where  the  physical  organ  has  become  diseased  or 
deformed,  a  slower  reaction  often  occurs.  This, 
however,  is  not  so  much  due  to  the  difficulty  of 
changing  the  physical  tissues  as  in  changing  the 
thought  or  consciousness  of  the  sufferer.  The  cell- 
life  is  stamped  with  the  image  of  disease,  and  we 
must  restore  the  perfect  concept  before  the  physical 
change  takes  place.  I  have  known  of  instantaneous 
cures  taking  place  so  rapidly  that  growths  have 
slipped  away  bodily,  or  swellings  have  been  reduced 
so  quickly  as  to  cause  a  great  itching  and  momen- 
tary heat.    In  such  case,  the  emotional  life  or  con- 


The  Emotional  Self  77 

sciousness  was  immediately  affected.  This  fre- 
quently happens  with  children  especially,  because 
they  take  the  word  of  the  healer  on  perfect  trust, 
and  as  faith  is  everything,  verily  it  has  its  own 
reward. 

We  are  having  some  remarkable  instances  of  the 
physical  effect  of  emotional  experiences  in  these 
days,  on  account  of  the  abnormal  psychology  of 
the  battle-field.  The  close  relation  between  mind 
and  body  is  continually  being  illustrated.  Take 
the  case  of  men  who  through  shell-shock  or  fear 
have  lost  sight  and  hearing.  In  some  instances, 
these  same  men  have  had  sight  and  hearing  re- 
stored by  a  counter  fear.  For  example  when  the 
hospital-ship  which  was  bringing  them  home  was 
sunk,  the  need  for  sight  or  hearing  in  order  to  pro- 
tect them  from  the  new  peril  was  so  great  as  to 
stimulate  the  creative  activity  so  that  they  were 
able  once  more  to  use  their  eyes  and  ears.  Fear 
acts  in  such  cases  as  a  strong  image  of  desire,  the 
impact  of  thought  is  insistent;  and  the  needed 
power  of  the  organ  is  instantaneously  restored. 

Mental  science  has  not  found  it  necessary  to 
make  any  wide  discrimination  between  what  is  called 
functional  and  organic  disease  because  the  same 
power  controls  both  and  heals  both.  Disease  is 
simply  the  image  of  wrong-thinking  sustained  in 
'consciousness  until  the  deformed  creation  takes 
place.  Health  is  the  right  image  acted  upon  in  the 
same  way.    It  is  probable,  however,  that  a  correct 


78  Being  and  Becoming 

diagnosis  will  help  materially  in  case  patient  and 
healer  do  not  have  a  high  state  of  consciousness  or 
faith.  In  that  case  the  error  of  thought  is  success- 
fully combated  by  higher  knowledge;  fear  is  re- 
moved by  a  better  understanding;  and  the  true 
concept  of  health  is  restored  to  the  mind  and  the 
afflicted  organ.  This  is  certainly  true  in  psycho- 
analytic practice.  At  the  same  time,  we  need  never 
stand  abashed  in  the  presence  of  any  disease,  be 
it  purely  psychic  or  not.  Spirit  is  all  from  one 
end  of  the  scale  to  the  other;  and  faith  and  per- 
sistency will  heal.  All  disease  is  mental  since  all 
is  mind ;  and  organic  troubles  are  simply  the  deeper- 
seated  habit  of  wrong  concepts.  Disease  and  health 
are  alike  mental  habits. 

The  Emotions  of  Health  and  Happiness. 

It  thus  becomes  clear  to  us  that  the  emotional 
or  creative  life  is  profoundly  affected  by  our 
thought  and,  being  entirely  neutral,  goes  on  func- 
tioning in  the  flesh  according  to  the  dominant  idea. 
It  is  just  as  true  for  health  and  happiness  as  it  is 
for  the  reverse.  And  as  the  majority  of  men  think 
healthful  and  hopeful  thoughts,  we  find  more  well 
people  than  sick  ones,  although  almost  every  one 
at  some  time  or  another  opens  himself  to  the  in- 
vasion of  wrong  thinking.  Pride  of  achievement, 
ambition,  love,  hope,  faith,  a  general  desire  for 
decency — these  and  many  other  qualities  keep  the 
mind  of  the  race  largely  occupied  and  are  guaran- 


The  Emotional  Self  79 

tees  against  the  false  ideas  and  ideals  of  a  lower 
order  of  living.  Whatever  most  fills  the  mind  will 
most  govern  the  destiny  whether  it  be  high  or  low, 
good  or  bad.  We  make  our  way  through  the  world, 
we  build  our  hell  or  heaven,  we  crawl  or  soar,  we 
sink  or  swim  by  the  choice  of  the  thoughts  that 
daily  swarm  in  the  throne-room  of  the  mind.  There 
within  sits  the  Christ-self,  master  of  life  and  hap- 
piness. He  alone  passes  final  decree.  His  word  is 
law.  The  feeling-life,  the  creative  intelligence 
within,  is  his  servant  doing  whatsoever  his  will 
shall  desire.  Infinite  in  resources  because  heir  of 
the  ages  and  one  with  the  Eternal;  possessing 
powers  transcendent  and  able  to  choose  what  he 
wrill  have,  man  passes  through  the  world,  selecting 
what  pathway  of  destiny  he  shall  follow,  what 
mountains  he  shall  climb,  to  what  stars  his  soul 
shall  soar,  through  the  selection  of  those  things 
that  fill  his  mind  and  thus  direct  his  creative  con- 
sciousness. 


CHAPTER    X. 
CHOOSING  WHAT  WE  WANT. 

WE  have  now  see*i  that  we  live  in  the  One 
Mind  which  thinks  what  it  wants  and  puts 
forth  into  expression  what  it  thinks.  The 
substance  of  the  universe  is  intelligence  or  life  on 
the  invisible  side  and  the  various  forms  are  ideas. 
On  the  visible  side  of  nature,  substance  and  form 
are  vibration  or  energy.  But  ideas  are  expressed 
in  the  form  of  thought ;  and  thought  is  also  energy, 
so  that  the  visible  universe  is  God's  thought.  We 
found,  too,  that  Being  thinks  definite  thoughts  or 
chooses  what  it  wants.  In  this  way,  it  acts  in  a 
personal  capacity.  Then  its  Creative  Activity 
comes  into  play  and  makes  what  it  chooses  come 
forth  into  form.  In  this  way,  it  acts  impersonally. 
Being  cannot  be  impersonal,  but  it  can  act  imper- 
sonally. By  the  courtesy  of  words,  we  may  often 
speak  of  Being  or  Mind  as  impersonal,  as  refer- 
ring to  its  impersonal  activity.  Yet  we  shall  lose 
the  very  sweetness  of  life  if  we  do  not  recognize 
this  fact :  as  Personal  Spirit,  God  loves,  feels,  wills, 
using  the  terms  in  the  philosophical  sense.  God 
does  not  love,  feel,  or  will  always  exactly  in  the 

80 


Choosing  What  We  Want  81 

human  way,  except  through  the  individual.  As 
the  Absolute  Person,  He  cannot  love,  feel,  or  will 
in  any  way  that  would  deny  His  absoluteness  or 
wholeness  of  vision.  As  impersonal  law,  He 
creates  whatever  idea  is  selected  either  by  Him  or 
another  for  creation. 

If,  now,  we^will  liken  the  ©ivine  Creative  Mind 
in  its  impersonal  capacity  to  the  soil,  we  shall  have 
a  good  picture  of  the  way  the  impersonal  mind 
works  for  us.  In  fact,  the  soil  is  the  Universal 
Creative  Mind  in  one  of  its  aspects,  for  it  is  the 
impersonal  mind  functioning  in  vibration.  Now 
we  all  know  that  the  soil  has  no  personal  will,  or 
purpose  of  its  own.  It  is  entirely  impersonal  or 
neutral.  It  does  not  care  whether  God  scatters  the 
seed  as  He  may  have  done  at  the  beginning  of 
the  visible  creation,  or  whether  the  tree  scatters 
it,  or  you  or  I.  It  will  take  your  seed  as  quickly 
as  it  will  take  mine.  Again,  it  does  not  care 
whether  the  seed  given  to  it  is  one  kind  or  another. 
It  does  not,  as  impersonal  mind,  care  what  seed  is 
given  it.  It  takes  all  seeds  into  its  bosom  with 
equal  love  and  care,  and  begins  to-  grow  each  thing 
after  its  kind. 

That  which  we  call  our  subjective  mind  is  one 
with  the  universal  impersonal  mind,  so  that  what- 
ever seed  of  thought  or  idea  we  scatter  in  our  mind 
will  take  root  there  and  grow  impersonally.  What- 
ever thought  is  most  strongly  impressed  upon  this 
mind  will  take  the  deepest  root.    That  is  why  some 


82  Being  and  Becoming 

people  are  never  sick.  No  thought  of  sickness  has 
ever  deeply  impressed  itself  upon  their  mind  and 
so  the  creative  activity  within  has  gone  on  normally, 
continuously  building  a  healthy  body.  There  is 
only  a  sense  of  well-being;  and  spirit  accordingly 
passes  through  into  manifestation  in  perfect  ex- 
pression. It  is  a  hard  saying  but  true  that  we  only 
have  to  feel  well  to  be  well.  Accordingly  every 
effort  must  be  made  to  bring  the  feeling-life  to  the 
point  of  quietness  and  ease,  that  the  perfect  work 
of  healing  may  go  on,  since  the  feeling-life  and  the 
creative  are  one. 

Using  the  Universal  Impersonal  Mind. 

Now  whatever  is  true  of  the  individual  imper- 
sonal mind  in  the  way  of  choice  is  also  true  of  the 
universal.  For  as  there  is  in  reality  no  point  of 
demarcation  between  the  being  which  man  is  and 
the  Being  which  spirit  is,  so  there  is  no  point  at 
which  the  inner  mind  fails  to  contact  the  mind  of 
the  infinite.  Both  minds  act  alike;  they  produce  ac- 
cording to  the  kind  and  strength  of  the  thought  or 
idea  impressed  upon  them. 

On  one  point,  however,  we  should  exercise  care. 
We  should  never  suppose  that  Being  will  act  in 
any  way  contrary  to  the  law  of  its  own  nature. 
For  example,  no  amount  of  suggestion  from  us  will 
ever  cause  it  to  make  water  run  uphill,  or  repeal 
the  law  of  the  attraction  of  gravitation,  or  set  the 
sun  back  half  an  hour.    Having  once  chosen  a  way 


Choosing  What  We  Want  83 

of  acting,  this  way  is  its  law  and  Being  goes  on  to 
create  in  accordance  with  it.  (See  Chapter  XIV, 
page  115.)  Yet  this  need  never  interfere  with  our 
hopes  and  plans,  for  there  is  room  for  everything 
we  can  desire  within  the  scope  of  the  law ;  and  each 
one  of  these  laws  can  be  made  our  servant.  Con- 
forming ourselves  to  the  law,  we  can  harness  the 
water;  we  can  depend  upon  the  stability  of  things 
that  come  through  the  attraction  of  the  earth;  and 
we  can  employ  the  rays  of  the  sun  to  grow  our 
gardens  and  to  light  our  path.  And  each  law  is 
thus  transcended  by  adapting  ourselves  to  it,  as 
in  the  case  of  flying,  for  example.  Nor  is  it  in- 
conceivable that  man  shall  learn  how  to  avoid  the 
pull  of  attraction  through  higher  knowledge;  we 
may  yet  fly  without  anything  more  than  a  good  pair 
of  closet  wings ;  and  a  new  Ford  may  rise  to  speed 
us  over  the  pathway  of  the  skies. 

But  with  this  warning  and  encouragement,  let 
us  see  how  we  may  legitimately  hope  to  employ 
the  impersonal  forces  of  the  one  and  only  mind  in 
which  we  find  ourselves.  Through  recognition  of 
this  unity,  we  may  not  only  demonstrate  over  phys- 
ical conditions  of  the  body;  but  also,  recognizing 
that  things  are  alive  with  intelligence,  we  may  learn 
how  to  govern  them  by  the  higher  activity  of  our 
own.  Thus  we  may  demonstrate  or  realize  pros- 
perity, or  the  reverse,  for  poverty  comes  in  the 
same  way.  The  Greater  Mind,  being  impersonal 
and  creative,  and  acting  upon  the  image  or  impress 


84  Being  and  Becoming 

of  prosperity  or  poverty,  of  joy  or  sorrow,  as  the 
case  may  be,  produces  "according  to  our  faith." 

Impersonal  Mind  a  Magic  Mirror. 

The  great  creative  mind  is  like  a  mirror.  It  will 
reflect  back  to  us  created  just  what  we  face  it  with. 
Some  of  us  would  be  very  glad  if  the  glass  would 
reflect  back  a  more  flattering  face  than  the  one 
we  give  it.  With  an  ordinary  mirror,  this  is  im- 
possible. With  the  Cosmic  it  is  the  same;  but,  in 
the  case  of  the  Cosmic,  we  may  give  it  a  fairer  idea 
of  what  we  want.  In  other  words,  we  can  con- 
ceive the  perfect  plan;  and  it  will  body  it  forth  in 
living  flesh  and  tissue.  This  would  be  literally 
true  even  of  our  faces.  I  have  known  of  people 
using  this  law  to  beautify  the  countenance.  I  said 
so  to  a  class  at  one  time  and  declared  that  while 
this  was  not  a  beauty  parlor,  yet  it  could  do  the 
work  of  one.  I  said,  "Any  one  can  use  the  law  and 
become  beautiful."  One  woman  raised  her  hand. 
"How  long  would  it  take?"  she  asked.  I  looked 
at  her — and  did  not  answer!  I  did  not  know. 
Nevertheless  this  should  not  be  considered  merely 
a  joke.  Whatever  concept  of  the  beautiful  you 
may  have  will  ultimately  be  bodied  forth  in  the 
face  and  form  if  you  so  decree.  Every  face  is  a 
reflex  of  the  thought-life  behind  it;  and  a  good 
psychologist  can  get  a  very  straight  idea  of  the 
thought-life  by  even  a  casual  glance  at  the  features 
in  which  it  is  registered.    Our  bodies  are  the  aggre- 


Choosing  What  We  Want  85 

gate  of  our  thinking  passed  into  form.  "Whatso- 
ever a  man  soweth  that  shall  he  also  reap/'  You 
cannot  sow  onion  seeds  and  reap  a  bouquet  of  sweet 
peas.  "Neither  do  men  gather  figs  of  thorns,  nor 
grapes  of  thistles,"  said  Jesus,  who  knew.  "Ac- 
cording to  your  faith,  be  it  unto  you,"  he  said. 
Faith  is  an  attitude  of  mind;  it  is  the  image  of 
expectancy  you  assume  toward  the  law.  Accord- 
ing to  its  kind,  the  law  gives  back  to  you.  If  you 
expect  to  be  cheated,  you  will  be  cheated.  If  you 
expect  honesty,  you  will  find  it.  The  man  who 
runs  around  with  a  chip  on  his  shoulder  will  meet 
an  Irishman  on  every  corner.  We  get  in  this 
world  a  return  in  kind.    Says  Lytton, 

1       "Let  any  man  once  show  the  world  that  he  feels 
Afraid  of  its  bark,  and  'twill  fly  at  his  heels; 
JLet  him  fearlessly  face  it,  'twill  leave  him  alone 
But  'twill  fawn  at  his  feet  if  he  flings  it  a  bone." 

It  is  on  this  basis  that  our  destiny  is  determined 
by  our  attitudes  of  mind.  He  who  faces  the  world 
with  good  cheer  and  a  smile,  will  see  the  world 
smile  back ;  but  he  who  faces  it  with  a  grouch  will 
hear  its  growl.  The  law  is  inexorable.  Sooner  or 
later,  it  pays  us  back  in  kind — "an  eye  for  an  eye 
and  a  tooth  for  a  tooth."  Of  it  Jesus  said,  "Not 
one  jot  or  one  tittle  shall  pass  away  until  all  be 
fulfilled."  In  even  the  smallest  matters,  it  works 
with  precision.  What  seeds  of  discord  some  are 
now  sowing.  "Sowing  to  the  wind  they  reap  the 
whirlwind !"    How  many  are  cursing  themselves  and 


86  Being  and  Becoming 

others.  We  hear  some  say  on  rising,  "I  suppose  I 
will  lose  money  to-day."  "I  fear  ruin  for  my  busi- 
ness." "Probably  the  rheumatism  will  bother  me 
to-day  again.  It's  damp."  "I  expect  people  won't 
understand  me  if  I  do  this,  even  if  it  is  right."  And 
the  "thing  we  greatly  fear  comes  upon  us."  Why? 
Because  we  attract  it!  We  have  already  damned 
ourselves  by  expecting  it.  That  was  our  "word"  to 
the  law ;  and  it  becomes  flesh  and  dwells  among  us. 
Our  "word"  is  our  image  or  the  seed  we  sow. 
If  we  sow  words  and  thoughts  of  inharmony,  we 
must  reap  discord.  As  Jesus  said  in  explaining  the 
parable,  "The  seed  is  the  word."  It  falls  into  the 
soil — or  divine  creative  mind — and  it  "grows  we 
know  not  how."  How  choice  then  must  we  be  of 
our  words!  The  Master  Metaphysician  said,  "By 
thy  words  thou  shalt  be  justified  and  by  thy  words 
thou  shalt  be  condemned."  We  must  choose  wisely 
our  words  or  attitudes  of  mind.  We  are  told  by 
the  poet: 

Give  love  and  love  to  your  life  will  flow* 
A  strength  in  your  utmost  need; 
Have  faith,  and  a  thousand  hearts  will  show 
Their  faith  in  your  word  and  deed. 

For  life  is  the  mirror  of  king  and  slave, 
Tis  just  what  you  are  and  do; 
Then  give  to  the  world  the  best  you  have 
And  the  best  will  come  back  to  you. 

The  Law  is  a  mirror.    Choose  wisely  the  image 
of  thought  you  give  to  it! 


CHAPTER   XL 
PICTURING  OUR  GOOD. 

IT  is  because  of  the  infinite  and  accurate  re- 
sponsiveness of  law  that  we  are  told  by  all 
metaphysicians  the  value  of  forming  our  con- 
cept or  image  of  reality.  Many  teachers  tell  us 
to  visualize  or  mentally  picture  the  thing  we  desire.  1/ 
But  it  is  not  so  much  a  necessity  to  form  the  image 
as  it  is  to  have  the  expectancy.  The  inner  mind 
of  us  will  often  mold  the  pattern,  for  "there  is  a 
Spirit  in  man  and  the  inspiration  of  the  Almighty 
gives  him  understanding."  The  major  necessity 
is  really  not  so  much  to  picture  the  thing;  as  it  is 
to  present  the  idea  to  the  creative  mind.  "Before 
they  call,  I  will  answer  them. — For  the  Father 
knoweth  what  things  ye  have  need  of,  before  ye 
ask  them."  On  many  occasions  I  have  made  dem- 
onstrations in  prosperity  where  the  result  seemed 
quite  different  from  the  anticipation — but  better. 
Why  was  this?  It  was  because  in  all  honesty  we 
were  seeking  the  best.  We  did  not  know  the  abso- 
lute best;  but  creative  mind  did.  We  presented  to 
creative  mind  the  idea  we  wanted  worked  out  ac- 
cording to  the  best  pattern  we  could  make.    And 

87 


88  Being  and  Becoming 

as  the  artist  sketches  the  idea  which  he  wishes  to 
embody  in  a  picture,  and  then  paints  it  with  a  skill 
beyond  his  first  vision,  so  the  Master  Architect,  the 
Law,  paints  for  us,  or  brings  into  objective  mani- 
festation for  us  the  idea  which  we  held  up  as  the 
"image"  or  "word"  to  it.  This  explains  many 
cases  where  the  spirit  of  healer  and  patient  is  right, 
even  though  their  concept  or  image  is  apparently 
faulty.  The  great  creative  mind  reflects  back  to 
us  our  coveted  good — with  its  universal  plus  added 
to  it.  Just  as  Jesus  said  of  those  who  give  gen- 
erously, "Give  and  it  shall  be  given  unto  you,  good 
measure  pressed  down  and  running  over  shall  men 
give  into  your  bosom." 

How  to  Use  the  Imagination  for  Creation. 

It  now  becomes  necessary  to  make  even  clearer 
the  principle  of  ideation  of  which  we  have  been 
speaking.  We  must  learn  to  distinguish  the  activ- 
ity of  creative  law  through  ideation  as  opposed  to 
concentration.  We  must  learn  the  infinite  superi- 
ority of  the  one  over  the  other,  if  we  are  to  become 
successful  in  the  work  of  healing  and  helping  hu- 
manity. It  is  through  the  principle  of  ideation  or 
image  formation  that  the  Spirit  creates  or  passes 
itself  into,  manifestation.  Being  is  becoming  mani- 
fest through  the  creative  faculty  acting  on  the  pure 
image  which  Spirit  projects.  When  Spirit  begins 
to  create  a  universe,  it  has  at  first  no  pattern  by 
which  to  guide  its  creation.     It  has  no  rose  utter- 


Picturing  Our  Good  89 

ing  its  sweetness  on  the  air;  no  bird  a-twitter  in 
its  leafy  nest ;  no  star  gleaming  in  the  crystal  blue. 
It  cannot  have  these  as  a  pattern  for  they  do  not 
exist  as  yet.  It  must  therefore  use  its  imagination ; 
it  must  imagine  a  rose ;  it  must  picture  a  star.  And 
so  it  does.  In  the  vast  chamber  of  Originating 
Spirit,  the  divine  canvas  is  unrolled;  and  the  Great 
Artist  dreams  forth  the  beau\y  of  the  spheres. 
Celestial  visionings !  Glorified  concepts !  Spirit 
sketching-in  a  world!  But  whatever  God  Thinks 
must  become.  Being  at  once  begins  its  becoming; 
and  the  great  Law  of  Mind,  which  is  its  method 
of  activity,  takes  up  the  image  and  bodies  forth 
a  world.  This  is  the  meaning  of  Genesis,  "The 
Spirit  of  God  moved  upon  the  waters."  "Wa- 
ters" is  the  esoteric  term  for  the  Law,  or  Creative 
Mind.  The  divine  idea  impresses  itself  on  the 
Creative  Mind;  and  a  world  passes  out  of  spirit 
into  manifestation. 

Man  repeats  the  creative  process.  As  spirit  acts, 
so  he.  He  dreams  a  dream,  and  the  creative  forces 
body  it  forth.  He  says,  "Let  this  thing  be;"  and 
it  becomes.  He  does  not  make  it;  he  accepts  it. 
See  how  it  is  all  lifted  out  of  the  region  of  strug- 
gle !  He  does  not  have  to  say  his  beads,  nor  "do" 
his  affirmations,  nor  concentrate  desperately  upon 
it.  We  have  had  people  enter  our  office,  with  their 
will  "all  screwed  up  to  the  sticking  point,"  muscles 
tense,  teeth  set,  determined  to  see  the  thing  through. 
— If  will  can  work,  it  surely  will !    They  have  got 


90  Being  and  Becoming 

hold  of  a  thought  and  are  clinging  to  it  like  grim 
death. 

Not  Will  But  Faith. 

This  form  of  concentration  is  to  say  the  least, 
unwise,  whether  practiced  on  oneself  or  another. 
It  acts  on  the  supposition  that  the  mind  or  will  of 
the  individual  is  creating  something  rather  than 
controlling  its  creation.  Indeed  the  will  does  have 
some  power ;  but  the  minute  the  thought  is  diverted, 
everything  flies  apart.  Many  become  discouraged 
after  practicing  this  method  for  a  time.  Their 
thoughts  fly  away  from  them;  and  they  despair  of 
ever  catching  them  again.  They  find  a  "good 
thought,"  corner  it,  grab  it  by  a  wing — and  it  slips 
out  of  their  hands !  Away  it  goes ;  and  they  after 
it  over  the  fence  and  through  a  hundred  back- 
yards! Finally  it  is  again  captured  but  only  to 
escape,  until  the  wearied  mind  gives  up  the  pursuit 
and  says,  "I  haven't  will  enough  to  do  it."  Yet 
healing  on  this  basis,  that  of  the  human  will  rather 
than  the  Divine  Mind,  has  been  the  only  kind  gen- 
erally accepted  by  organized  religion.  This  fact  is 
easily  proven  by  reference  to  literature  on  the  sub- 
ject. The  world  has  been  slow  to  learn  the  lesson 
the  Master  taught:  "Take  my  yoke — the  yoke  of 
the  Spirit — upon  you,  and  learn  of  me; — for  my 
yoke  is  easy  and  my  burden  is  light."  The  way  of 
the  Spirit  is  a  better  way.  Concentration  is  not 
your  curative  agent!     "Of  mine  own  self,  I  can 


Picturing  Our  Good  gl 

do  nothing."  The  creative  mind  within  you,  and 
the  creative  mind  in  which  you  live,  move  and  have 
your  being,  does  your  work  for  you.  Your  part  is 
to  formulate  your  idea  and  let  the  Law  do  the 
rest.  Suppose  your  mind  does  wander.  If  you 
have  formed  a  clear  image  of  your  desire  and 
turned  it  over  to  the  law,  and  really  believe  the 
law  is  working  on  it,  and  that  you  will  get  results, 
your  work  is  done..  "Commit  thy  ways  unto  the 
Lord  (or  Law),  trust  also  in  Him;  and  He  shall 
bring  it  to  pass."  I  have  healed  ^patients  while  they 
were  telling  me  their  troubles  ovfef  the  telephone 
or  passing  out  of  a  crowded  room  ITter  a  lecture. 
How?  Simply  by  believing  the  words*  of  the  Mas- 
ter. "Ye  shall  know  the  Truth ;  and  the  Truth  shall 
set  you  free.  And  as  the  Father  hath  inherent 
life  in  himself,  so  hath  he  given  it  to  the  son  to 
have  inherent  life  in  himself."  "The  Truth"  is 
the  law  of  spirit's  activity.  Know  that  the  creative 
mind  is  on  your  job ;  and  "it  shall  be  done  unto  you, 
even  as  ye  will."  #  # 

Concentration  vs.  Ideation. 

The  difference  between  the  method  of  "concentra- 
tion" as  an  effort  of  will  and  "ideation"  is  that  in 
the  former  you  feel  you  have  something  to  do;  in  • 
the  latter  you  have  something  to  be.  For,  the 
moment  you  realize  a  thing  to  be  true  already  in 
Spirit,  that  moment  it  is.  "Before  they  call,  I 
will  answer  them."    This,  too,  is  the  meaning  of  • 


92  Being  and  Becoming 

the  Great  Teacher,  "When  ye  pray,  believe  ye  have 
received;  and  ye  shall  receive."  Believe  that  the 
creative  mind  has  taken  up  your  case,  believe  that 
in  the  absolute  of  being  your  desire  is  already  real- 
ized, believe  that  the  perfect  image  or  immaculate 
conception  of  your  mind  has  registered  on  the 
Divine  Mind,  believe  that  the  spiritual  reality  or 
prototype  now  is,  believe  that  if  your  vision  were 
keen  enough  you  could  now  see  the  health  of  the 
body  or  wealth  of  estate  you  crave.  If  it  is  a 
house,  that  house  now  is,  either  on  an  objective 
plane  or  in  the  finer  ether,  soon  to  manifest.  "Hast 
thou  faith:  only  believe,"  these  are  the  words  of 
the  Teacher.  Then  because  ye  believe  that  your 
good  is  yours,  and  that  spirit  has  set  it  aside  for 
you  already,  "ye  shall  receive."  Your  good  is  on 
the  way!  Being  is  becoming!  Spirit  is  passing 
through ! 

And  now  some  one  could  object,  I  suppose,  to 
all  this  on  the  ground  that  it  thrusts  too  much  re- 
sponsibility upon  the  individual.  Are  we  not  in 
danger  of  making  wrong  choices  and  thus  causing 
the  law  to  operate  continuously  upon  our  misshapen 
images?  Will  we  not  constantly  be  setting  forces 
in  motion  which  we  cannot  control  and  thus  bring 
upon  ourselves  the  very  evils  which  we  would 
avoid?  And  one  must  answer,  "Yes,"  though  I 
would  not  admit  it  as  a  flaw  in  the  divine  order. 
It  is  the  very  token  of  the  sublimity  of  my  own 
soul  that  I  can  choose  even  hell  if  I  want  to.     If 


Picturing  Our  Good  93 

heaven  is  to  be  thrust  upon  me,  who  is  to  thrust 
it?  Your  kind  of  heaven  might  be  hell  for  me. 
A  certain  minister  said  that  it  would  be  heaven  for 
him  to  recline  on  a  couch  through  all  eternity  and 
have  his  wife  ruffle  his  hair.  "But,"  he  added,  "it 
would  be  hell  for  her."  And  so  it  might.  No,  I 
must  be  able  to  choose;  and  it  is  no  choice  at  all 
unless  I  can  choose  that  which  may  not  be  at  all 
for  my  best  good  but  rather  for  my  worst. 

It  must  be  remembered  that  choice  consists  in 
selecting  for  ourselves  those  combinations  of  things 
and  ideas  which  fit  our  own  particular  interest. 
If  we  were  without  choice,  we  would  also  be  with- 
out individuality.  Your  individuality  is  different 
from  mine  in  just  this  respect,  that  you  select  a 
different  set  of  interests  from  mine.  You  prefer 
a  different  type  of  friend;  you  enjoy  games  that 
I  do  not  enjoy ;  you  read  different  books ;  you  select 
cake  instead  of  cookies;  and  you  would  not  per- 
haps think  it  fun  to  bathe  in  the  ocean  in  winter. 
The  things  that  interest  each  of  us  constitute  a  set 
of  ideas  that  are  individual.  Even  were  we  to  eat 
the  same  food,  breathe  the  same  air,  and  drink  from 
the  same  well,  we  wrould  not  be  alike.  If  Jack 
Spratt  and  his  wife  had  both  eaten  fat  and  both 
eaten  lean,  Jack  might  have  been  fat  while  Mrs. 
Spratt  remained  lean  all  of  her  life,  because  he 
thought  big  jolly  thoughts  while  she  worried  about 
everything.  She  might  have  been  a  very  thin 
thinker. 


94  Being  and  Becoming 

So,  of  course,  we  may  make  mistakes  in  the  se- 
lection of  our  interests  and  the  combination  of 
our  ideas.  In  which  case  we  would  get  into  trou- 
ble, for  fear  and  faith  amount  to  the  same  thing 
in  the  end,  in  that  each  is  an  attitude  of  mind,  an 
idea  which  will  bring  to  us  manifest,  just  what  we 
have  uttered  into  Creative  Mind.  The  one  we  call 
evil,  because  we  do  not  like  it;  the  other  we  call 
good  because  we  do. 

But  if  we  bring  upon  ourselves  some  deplorable 
evil,  what  then?  Why  it  comes;  and  we  do  not 
like  it;  and  we  change  our  way  of  thinking.  Ex- 
pectancy and  wrong  choice  brought  it.  Expectancy 
and  changed  choice  will  remove  it. 

Theory  of  Denials. 

Just  here  we  may  well  consider  the  theory  of 
denials  which  play  so  much  a  part  in  the  teaching 
of  some  systems  of  thought.  The  theory  is  builded 
upon  the  obvious  fact  that  there  is  something  in 
experience  which  we  do  not  like,  which  we  call 
evil.  But  as  God  is  the  All-Good,  and  there  can- 
not be  anything  outside  of  Him,  then  there  cannot 
be  any  real  evil.  It  is  only  apparent.  It  is  an 
illusion  of  the  mortal  mind. 

What  is  wrong  in  this  argument?  We  have  al- 
ready seen  that  there  can  be  only  one  mind  and  to 
admit  of  any  other  mind  that  can  experience  any- 
thing at  all,  is  to  admit  a  dual  universe,  even  if  we 
go  way  round  the  bush  and  call  it  "mortal"  or 


Picturing  Our  Good  95 

"human,"  "carnal,"  erroneous  thought,  cinema  pic- 
ture, illusion,  lie,  and  all  those  other  synonyms  for 
a  second  mind.  And  to  say  that  the  evil  itself  is 
an  illusion,  is  to  say  that  we  can  experience  an 
illusion.  In  fact,  to  deny  a  thing  is  to  Confess  it, 
for  if  we  did  not  experience  it,  we  would  not  know 
anything  about  it.  But  if  we  can  experience  an 
illusion  of  pain  and  evil,  is  that  not  just  the  same 
thing  as  saying  that  we  experience  the  pain  and 
evil?  "A  rose  by  any  other  name  would  smell  as 
sweet;"  and  evil  by  the  name  of  illusion  feels  as 
bad. 

We  have  already  seen,  however,  that  whatever 
we  experience  is  the  physical  expression  erf  a  super- 
physical  idea;  that  is,  we  bring  forth  in  form  just 
what  we  conceive  in  thought.  Our  partial  view  of 
things,  our  mistaken  choices,  have  brought  forth 
the  monstrosity  at  which  we  shudder.  Clothed  in 
flesh,  we  perceive  how  wrong  or  vile  was  our 
thought.  But  here  it  is  in  flesh  or  in  circumstance ! 
What  are  we  to  do  ?  Forget  what  we  do  not  want 
and  declare  what  we  da  want. 

In  cases  where  the  thought  cannot  conceive  the 
perfectly  rounded  idea  of  health  or  prosperity  on 
account  of  the  immediate  circumstances  of  pain 
or  lack,  it  may  sometimes  help  to  state,  "I  do  no 
longer  allow  it.  It  shall  not  be."  In  this  you  do 
not  deny  the  (experience ;  but  you  refuse  any  longer 
to  recognize  it.  I  have  a  great  friend,  a  powerful 
healer,  who  tells  me  how  she  acted  in  her  own  case. 


96  Being  and  Becoming 

Being  resolved  to  be  free  of  her  sickness,  she  felt 
impelled  to  a  vocal  declaration,  but  lived  in  an 
apartment  where  she  could  not  make  all  the  noise 
she  wanted  to.  So  she  cast  herself  on  the  bed, 
buried  her  face  in  the  pillow,  drew  another  over 
her  to  stifle  the  sound  and  yelled  at  the  top  of  her 
lungs,  somewhat  like  this,  "I  won't  be  sick.  I 
won't  be  sick.  I  will  not  have  it."  These  may  not 
have  been  her  exact  words ;  but  it  was  her  thought ; 
and  it  healed  her. 

The  purpose  is  to  get  rid  of  the  feeling  one  has 
of  suffering  and  sorrow  and  unhappiness  and  want, 
and  make  way  for  the  influx  of  health  and  all 
other  forms  of  good.  This  enables  us  to  hold  up 
the  clear  image  or  feeling  of  the  thing  we  desire, 
and  Creative  Mind  then  has  a  clear  pattern  to  work 
upon  to  bring  forth  our  idea  into  physical  ex- 
pression. 

Thus  we  see  that  in  this  system  of  teaching  there 
is  no  room  for  denials  at.  all.1 

For  to  state  that  we  will  not  be  sick  or  unhappy 
is  really  an  affirmation.  To  say  that  we  will  not 
yield  to  the  fear  or  danger  in  which  we  find  our- 
selves is  not  to  deny  that  what  is  so#  plainly  evi- 
dent to  us  is  an  experience,  but  to  affirm  that  it 
cannot  "get  us."  So  the  Ninety-First  Psalm  does 
not  state  that  no  one  ever  falls  or  suffers  from 
plague,  but  it  does  say,  "It  shall  not  come  nigh 

1See  also  pages  66-68,  How  to  Develop  Faith  That  Heals,  by  the 
author. 


Picturing  Our  Good  97 

thee.  Only  with  thine  eyes  [not  in  your  own  per- 
sonal experience]  shalt  thou  behold  and  see  the 
reward  of  the  wicked.  Because  he  hath  set  his 
love  upon  me,  therefore  will  I  deliver  him."  De- 
liver him  from  what  ?  Certainly  not  from  an  illu- 
sion, but  a  real  peril.  "I  will  set  him  on  high  be- 
cause he  hath  known  my  name." 

It  thus  becomes  clear  that  the  determining  factor 
of  our  lives,  whether  for  good  or  ill,  is  the  con- 
cept or  idea  which  we  hold.  If  our  thought  is 
ever  upward  in  expectancy,  we  shall  ever  draw  to 
us  the  finest  and  the  best.  If  we  picture  the  lovely 
and  true,  and  expect  it,  verily  our  faith  shall  have 
its  reward. 

Note  what  we  have  said:  "If  we  select  our  good, 
and  paint  it  in  living  colors  of  faith,  it  will  come  to 
us!y  Many  there  are  who  think  good  thoughts  and 
wish  for  the  best  to  happen.  Once  in  a  while  there 
rises  a  man  who  commands  it  to  appear;  and  it 
does  appear  because  he  believes  that  it  will  come. 


CHAPTER  XII. 
A  DEFINITE  METHOD  FOR  REALIZATION. 

WE  now  see  clearly  enough  that  we  live  in 
the  midst  of  an  All-Embracing  Mind 
which  presses  in  upon  us  at  every  point 
in  the  unseen  nature  of  intelligence,  and  every- 
where manifests  in  the  forms  of  loveliness  and 
beauty,  in  the  stupendous  and  awe-inspiring  forces 
of  the  earthquake  and  the  storm.  For  God  is  God 
of  all  and  nothing  can  go  on  in  the  great  cosmic 
unfoldments  apart  from  His  will.  He  it  was  who 
set  the  universes  afloat  in  the  vast  sea  of  space ;  and 
He  it  is  who  drives  three  hundred  thousand  suns 
through  the  measureless  race-courses  of  the  uni- 
verse. There  could  not  be  an  objective  world  of 
stupendous  and  changing  forces  without  the  great 
cataclysms  of  nature. 

Yet  man  is  to  fear  nothing  in  the  midst  of  them, 
for  he  can  mount  on  the  wings  oi  spiritual  under- 
standing; he  can  walk  upon  the  waves  of  a  chang- 
ing world;  he  can  pass  unscathed  through  the  tor- 
rent and  the  flame ;  he  can  escape  from  every  peril, 
through  the  mastership  of  his  spirit.  He  can  if  he 
zvill  but  choose.     He  must  choose  to  depend  upon 


A  Definite  Method  for  Realization      99 

the  higher  intuitions  of  his  soul  to  guide  his  steps, 
and  the  genius  of  his  own  mind  to  select  that  good 
which  he  desires  to  manifest  for  him. 

We  see,  therefore,  that  it  is  of  tKe~~utmost  im- 
portance for  us  to  understand  that  we  live  in  a 
world  of  law ;  that  substance  is  mind,  and  that  the 
determining  factor  is  choice.  God's  choices  are  the 
great  cosmic  ones;  He  does  not  interfere  with 
ours.  In  other  words,  God  sets  in  motion  great 
laws  by  which  the  world  and  man  is  evolved.  He 
makes  selection  of  definite  lines  of  activity  and 
then  goes  on  unfolding  along  those  lines  to  the  ulti- 
mate conclusion.  So  regular  is  the  operation  of 
his  mind  in  these  great  operations  that  we  may  well 
call  it  law,  and  depend  upon  it  that  it  cannot  be 
broken.  Jesus,  the  Master  Teacher  of  the  Law  of 
Mind,  said,  "Not  one  jot  nor  one  tittle  shall  be 
taken  away  from  the  law,  until  all  be  fulfilled."  In 
other  words,  the  law  is  absolutely  exact,  and  can 
be  depended  upon  to  produce  each  thing  after  its 
kind  of  thought. 

The  first  step  for  us  to  take  is  to  put  the  mind 
in  an  attitude  of  expectant  faith.1 

We  can  make  statements  of  our  attitude,  for 
they  inspire  our  confidence.  They  hold  the  mind 
steady.  They  keep  the  image  or  idea  clear.  They 
assert  our  faith.  As  a  man  whistles  to  inspire  his 
own  cheer,  so  we  say  to  ourselves,  "Cheer  up,  it's 


1See  Lesson   III,   "How  to  Use  the  Law— the   Silence,"  in   The 
Law  of  Mind  in  Action,  by  the  author. 


100  Being  and  Becoming 

all  coming  out  all  right."  "Cheer  up,"  said  Jesus, 
"thy  faith  hath  saved  thee,  go  in  peace."  State- 
ments of  truth  are  always  helpful  in  inspiring  our 
confidence  and  expectancy,  unless  we  turn  them 
into  magic  formulas  and  phrases,  when  they  lose 
most  of  their  power.  Words  are  designed  to  pro- 
duce a  corresponding  feeling  on  the  inner  plane; 
if  they  fail  to  do  this,  they  have  no  value.  In  so 
far  as  they  succeed  in  doing  this,  however,  they 
have  creative  value.  It  is  because  words  almost 
invariably  engender  feeling  that  we  are  to  guard 
against  their  idle  use.  The  purpose  of  statements 
is  to  lead  us  into  realization  of  the  truth  that  is 
to  make  us  free. 

We  must  rid  the  mind  of  any  sense  of  struggle, 
for  if  we  plant  the  seed  the  soil  will  do  all  the 
work  for  us.  "The  seed  is  the  word ;"  and  the  soil 
is  Creative  Mind.  We  cannot  grow  the  flower. 
God  blooms  the  rose.  "Paul  plants;  Apollos  wa- 
ters ;  but  God  giveth  the  increase." 

We  must  then  realize  that  all  conscious  mental 
effort  is  not  so  much  to  be  turned  to  the  acquire- 
ment of  things  as  to  establish  in  ourselves  a  con- 
sciousness or  mental  attitude  of  expectancy.  And 
no  matter  what  process  may  be  essential  to  reach 
this  consciousness,  still,  in  the  end,  this  is  some- 
thing that  we  cannot  do  without.  For  conscious- 
ness is  the  deep-seated  perception  of  reality!  In 
the  end,  there  is  but  one  thing  to  do : — to  believe 
that  what  we  want  will  become  manifest  for  us; 


A  Definite  Method  for  Realization    101 

and  then  to  state  definitely  and  positively  what  we 
want. 

Good  exists  in  two  forms,  the  good  that  lies 
within  the  bosom  of  the  Father  as  an  eternal  pos- 
sibility, but  unmanifest  and  undifferentiated;  and 
the  good  that  we  choose.  Before  we  choose,  it  is 
a  universal  concept.  After  we  choose,  it  is  an 
individual  concept  and  becomes  an  individual  pos- 
session. 

Being  in  the  Process  of  Becoming. 

The  word  is  made  flesh  and  dwells  among  us, 
only  after  we  speak  the  word.  So  the  second  step 
will  be  for  us  to  declare  what  we  want.  This  is 
our  choice.  For  practical  purposes,  I  have  found 
it  especially  desirable  in  severe  cases  to  establish 
the  practice  of  lying  down  immediately  after  lunch- 
eon or  dinner  or  both,  and  then  to  realize  the  truth. 
At  this  time,  spirit  in  the  form  of  food,  drink, 
and  air  begins  to  pass  into  physical  form  and  en- 
ergy. If  one  will  be  quiet  and  realize  that  spirit 
is  thus  passing  into  another  manifestation,  that 
being  is  becoming,  and  will  thus  impress  this  idea 
firmly  upon  his  own  consciousness,  the  physical 
body  will  respond  to  his  mental  equivalent  and 
health  will  be  the  result.  In  cases  of  so-called  in- 
digestion and  dyspepsia  and  those  ailments  which 
most  readily  reflect  mental  states,  this  method  has 
secured  especially  quick  results,  for  the  stomach 
is  a  perfect  mirror  of  the  mind.     Indigestion  and 


102  Being  and  Becoming 

colds,  being  due  to  chaotic  thought  and  worry,  are 
easily  healed  by  the  calm  and  poise  6f  one  who 
rests  for  a  moment  in  the  infinite  realities  of  Spirit. 
"In  quietness  and  confidence  shall  be  my  strength/' 
"My  health  cometh  from  the  Lord,  which  made 
heaven  and  earth."  "Thou  wilt  keep  him  in  per- 
fect peace,  whose  mind  is  stayed  on  Thee."  The 
realization  of  Spirit — myself  as  Spirit,  my  body, 
my  conditions  and  my  world — is  the  whole  aim  of 
metaphysical  treatment.  Let  this  once  be  accom- 
plished and  man  stands  forth,  an  immortal,  glori- 
fied and  glorious,  god  to  his  own  world,  at  one 
with  the  infinite  harmony.  Life  swells  to  its  banks 
with,  the  tides  of  a  divine  joy;  and  .man  rises  to  sit 
on  the  throne  of  his  being.  Being  has  in  him  be- 
come. 


CHAPTER   XIII. 

USING  THE  LAW  OF  IMPERSONAL  MIND 
IN  THE  CASE  OF  PROSPERITY. 

MANY  believe  in  the  power  to  demonstrate 
over  the  body  without  being  able  to  un- 
derstand the  control  of  circumstances,  en- 
vironment and  prosperity.  Of  course,  this  rises 
out  of  a  limited  understanding  of  the  law  with 
which  we  deal.  Many  books  have  been  written 
which  have  become  acceptable  to  large  numbers 
of  ultra-orthodox  people  because  they  teach  the 
"power  of  -mind  over  the  body"  without  admit- 
ting too  wide  a  divinity  to  that  mind,  as  if  indeed 
it  were  a  reflection  upon  God  that  He  had  endowed 
man  with  such  vast  power  as  the  metaphysician 
claims  for  him.  Such  books  assume  that  the  crea- 
tive mind  in  men  is  quite  apart  from  the  creative 
mind  of  the  Infinite.  This  creative,  subjective  mind 
can  be  understood  to  control  the  physical  organs 
which  are  under  its  immediate  direction,  through 
nerve  and  neurone,  through  cell  and  tissue,  "by 
suggestion,"  and  by  the  "new  method"  of  which 
we  have  already  spoken.  According  to  this  theory 
there  are  many  minds, — not  only  many  objective 

103 


104  Being  and  Becoming 

expressions  of  mind,  but  many  subjective  or  imper- 
sonal minds.  What,  then,  will  these  say  when  we 
affirm  that  there  is  only  one  such  mind,  and  that  it 
is  not  I — the  individual  that  speaks — "it  is  my 
Father  dwelling  in  me ;  He  doeth  the  works." 

This  is  the  teaching  of  the  Great  Healer;  and 
it  is  a  great  and  glorious  concept.  There  are  not 
two  minds ;  there  is  only  one.  The  mistake  of  sup- 
posing that  there  are  two  minds  has  been  the  error 
of  the  ages.  But  we  have  seen  that  Spirit  or  Mind 
is  one ;  and  "beside  Me  there  is  none  other."  This 
being  true,  the  mind  which  I  call  mine  and  which 
directs  the  physical  activities  of  my  body  is  the 
same  Mind  that  rules  the  stars — not  all  of  that 
Mind,  nor  yet  a  part  of  that  Mind  but  that  Mind 
acting  in  me  as  individual.  We  may  get  a  figure  of 
how  this  is,  in  the  weather.  I  speak  of  the  weather 
here  in  Los  Angeles,  as  I  look  out  upon  nature's 
beauties,  with  the  sun  bursting  through  clouds,  only 
to  be  covered  again  by  the.  drifting  fogs.  Nature 
is  in  many  moods  to-day  and  shows  her  infinite  vari- 
eties ;  but  the  weather  in  Los  Angeles  is  not  a  part 
of  the  weather,  nor  yet  is  it  the  whole  of  the 
weather.  It  is  just  weather.  My  mind  with  its 
infinite  capacities  and  varied  moods  is  just  Mind 
— "one  with  the  Infinite  Mind."  This  being  true, 
I,  as  an  individual,  am  in  contact  with  universal 
Mind.  We  must  not  forget  that  Universal  Mind 
or  Spirit  is  not  only  present  as  Intelligence  in  all 
and  a  Life  in  All,  but  also  literally  is  the  All ;  and 


Using  the  Law  of  Impersonal  Mind    105 

all  nature  is  alive.  Whatever  activity,  therefore, 
is  displayed  in  mind,  whether  it  be  myself  or  the 
universal  that  thinks,  must  be  felt  all  over,  must 
register  all  over.  Just  as  a  word  spoken  into  the 
air  goes  out  and  out  in  ever-widening  vibrations, 
so  my  word  or  thought  in  mind  goes  out  and  out 
through  all  mind.  And  what  is  true  or  felt  to  be 
true  in  my  mind  must  be  true  in*  every  individual- 
ized consciousness^  at  all  times,  and  everywhere. 

Accordingly  if  I  wish  to  make  a  demonstration 
for  prosperity,  I  must  realize  that  "my  word  shall 
not  return  to  me  void,  but  it  shall  accomplish  that 
which  I  please  and  it  shall  prosper  in  that  whereto 
I  sent  it."  My  word  is  my  thought,  my  desire, 
spoken  into  Creative  Mind,  and  "according  to  my 
faith  it  shall  be  done  unto  me." 

The  Law  of  Spirit. 

In  making  a  demonstration  for  prosperity,  there- 
fore, I  must  realize  that  I  am  speaking  into  the 
only  mind  there  is,  and  backed  by  the  only  power 
there  is.  The  Law  of  Spirit  is  back  of  me.  What 
is  this  law?  It  is  the  creative  mind  acting  with- 
out reservation  to  create  upon  the  image  or  idea 
which  it  has  presented  to  itself.  For  in  me,  Spirit 
or  Mind  has  9tarted  a  new  center  of  activity  around 
which  its  creative  forces  are  to  work.  To  be  sure, 
I,  the  individual  conceive  it,  but  who  am  I?  I  am 
an  individualized  center  of  Spirit's  own  conscious- 
ness.   In  me,  seeking  Its  fulfillment,  Spirit  has  be" 


106  Being  and  Becoming 

gun  Its  work  from  a  new  level.  As  I  think,  Spirit 
thinks;  indeed  Spirit  is  thinking  through  me;  and 
when  there  comes  to  me  some  lofty  thought  which 
sets  me  all  aglow  with  creative  feeling — and  there 
is  no  higher  joy  than  that  of  creative  thought — I 
know  that  Spirit  has  found  an  outlet  for  itself 
through  me.  This  is  why  one's  greatest  endeavor 
must  be  to  harmonize  himself  with  God,  for  when 
divine  accord  has  been  secured  and  we  are  in  tune, 
Spirit  can  most  easily  make  us  the  instruments  of 
its  advanced  thinking.  Who  is  an  advanced  thinker  ? 
Who  is  an  illumined  soul  ?  The  man  who,  by  thor- 
ough preparation  of  his  soul,  has  made  himself  an 
instrument  through  which  God  can  easiest  and 
oftenest  manifest  to  the  world. 

Mental  Equivalents. 

Are  we  then  to  say  that  the  best  way  to  obtain 
prosperity  is  without  business  method?  Certainly 
not.  What  we  do  say  is  that  we  can  have  only 
those  things  to  which  we  can  bring  a  mental  equiva- 
lent. Have  I  a  mind  that  corresponds  to  this  posi- 
tion? If  so,  I  may  expect  to  hold  it.  Do  I  feel  a 
capacity  for  this  work?  Then  I  may  have  it. 
What  gives  me  what  I  want,  then,  is  my  mental 
equivalent,  so  that  what  I  must  seek,  at  whatever 
cost,  is  a  mental  correspondent,  a  mind  that  matches 
my  desired  good. 

If  I  can  get  this  mental  equivalent,  if  I  have  the 
f^ith  to  gee  myself  in  possession  of  what  I  want 


Using  the  Law  of  Impersonal  Mind    109 

lent  to  those  for  whom  we  work,  or  are  giving  a 
mental  equivalent  to  Spirit,  and  are  fulfilling  its 
desire  of  acting  through  us,  we  shall  find  It  "more 
ready  to  give  than  we  are  to  receive!"  For  many 
of  my  patients  I  have  tal^en  liberties  with  Bur- 
rough's  poem,  and  given  them  this : 

"Asleep,  awake,  by  night  or  day, 
The  good  I  seek,  is  seeking  me; 
No  wind   can   drive  my  bark  astray 
Or  change  the  tide  of  destiny." 

Spirit  is  seeking  to  manifest  itself  as  our  good. 

One  who  has  had  much  practice  in  acquiring  a 
mental  correspondent  does  not  need  much  time  to 
make  a  demonstration.  He  "knows ;"  and  that  fin- 
ishes it.  But  we  all  find  it  necessary  to  go  through 
the  period  when  "just  to  know,"  is  not  so  easy. 
We  need  argument.  We  need  to  see,  reason,  feel 
and  understand.  For  this  reason  I  often  treat  pa- 
tients orally  before  holding  the  silent  realization. 
This  helps  them  to  a  mental  attitude  and  often  heals 
the  sick.  Indeed,  many  are  cured  by  simply  being 
told  the  why  of  things.  Ignorance  begets  unwhole- 
someness ;  understanding  restores  the  wholeness. 
Any  one  can  get  results  by  securing  a  realization  in 
some  such  a  manner  as  this : 

Centering  the  Thought  for  the  Realization  of 
Prosperity. 

Sit  in  the  silence  and  meditate  upon  the  fact  that 


110  Being  and  Becoming 

all  is  Spirit.  Even  the  things  I  see  are  spirit  in 
Form.  So-called  "matter"  is  only  a  form  of  spirit. 
Spirit  is  intelligence  so  these  things  are  full  of  in- 
telligence. I  am  spirit;  and  one  phase  of  spirit  can 
have  contact  with  another.  The  highest  center  of 
spirit  can  rule  the  lower.  So  I  am  ruler  over  these 
things  or  thought-forms.  Difficulties,  get  out  of 
the  way!  You  have  no  real  power.  I  take  all 
your  power  away  fr6m  me.  (Go  on  in  this  way  if 
you  feel  the  need,  pulling  out  all  the  roots  of  your 
wrong  thinking  and  fear.)  Now  I  know  that  all 
is  spirit.  I  am  glad  that  all  is  spirit  and  mind  is 
everything.  So  now  I  open  up  my  mind  to  receive 
this  good  (mention  the  desired  object)  that  I  want. 
I  have  a  place  for  it.  I  have  a  right  to  it.  Father, 
I  accept  it  from  Thy  hand.  Spirit  of  love,  you  can 
express  this  to<  me  now.  I  am  ready  to  receive  it. 
I  am  glad  for  it.  I  give  thanks  for  it.  It  is  good 
to  know  that  Thou,  O  Divine  Giver,  carest  for  me 
enough  to  give  it.  Yes,  for  me  "every  good  and 
perfect  gift  cometh  from  the  Father,  with  whom 
there  is  no  variableness,  neither  shadow  of  turn- 
ing."  It  is  so  good  to  know  that  Thou  dost  not 
change,  that  Thy  law  is  perfect  and  dependable, 
that  I  can  have  this  good  (mention  it)  because 
Thou  givest  according  to  my  faith.  And  now  I 
know  Thou  hearest  me  always ;  and  my  faith  does 
not  waver.  Out  of  Thy  hand,  my  good  now  comes, 
I  receive  it  now,    I  thank  Thee  now, 


CHAPTER  XIV. 

SUMMARY  OF  LAW  OF  IMPERSONAL 
MIND. 

WE  can  well  illustrate  the  whole  process  of 
being  as  it  is  becoming  manifest,  or  the 
passing  of  Spirit  into  form,  in  the  prin- 
ciple of  the  stereopticon.  The  light  represents 
Spirit  or  the  Originating  Source,  or  First  Cause  or 
Being.  The  slide  or  plate  with  the  picture  on  it 
represents  the  point  of  transition  in  which  the 
undifferentiated  light  begins  to  differentiate  itself. 
It  must  be  remembered  that  the  light  is  the  same 
whether  it  be  at  the  source,  the  center,  or  the  end 
of  the  series.  It  is  light  always.  Spirit  is  spirit 
always;  no  matter  what  form  it  may  assume.  But 
just  as  the  prism  will  refract  the  rays  of  the  sun 
into  the  cardinal  colors  and  cast  the  rainbow  on 
our  desk  so  the  slide  in  the  lantern  will  mold  and 
form  the  light  into  the  very  form  it  will  manifest 
on  the  screen.  The  slide  represents  our  thought, 
idea,  or  image.  What  we  choose,  what  we  desire, 
what  we  expect,  what  we  fear,  what  we  believe  in 
— these  are  the  thoughts  which  mold  and  fashion 
being  as  it  passes  into  manifestation  in  our  lives. 

Ill 


112  Being  and  Becoming 

The  Will. 

The  lens  by  which  the  rays  of  light  from  the  pic- 
ture are  concentrated  represent  the  will.  Using 
the  word  will  as  meaning  choice,  we  find  that  we 
have  the  ability  to  choose  what  we  shall  hold  as  an 
image  of  thought.  Using  it  as  meaning  concentra- 
tion, we  find  that  we  have  the  gift  of  will  or  de- 
termination which  keeps  the  mind  "one-pointed" 
until  all  be  fulfilled.  The  light,  then,  which  is  Crea- 
tive Mind,  will  keep  working  upon  the  model  of  our 
thought  only  so  long  as  we  hold  the  model  before 
it.  Being  infinitely  creative  and  impersonal,  it  will 
take  any  idea  and  begin  to  construct  accordingly; 
and  every  word  we  speak  and  every  thought  we 
think  is  backed  up  by  that  power.  It  is  the  purpose 
of  the  will  to  insist  that  the  mind  shall  hold  on  to 
its  desire  and  its  purpose  until  spirit  has  passed 
into  the  desired  form. 

The  Manifestation. 

The  picture  on  the  screen  corresponds  to  matter, 
body,  conditions,  form.  It  is  being  become  mani- 
fest. It  is  spirit  occupying  space  and  time.  "Mat- 
ter is  spirit  at  its  lowest  level."  So  while  we  dis- 
tinctly see  a  real  picture  on  the  screen,  still  the 
substance  of  it  is  light  or  spirit.  How  absurd  to 
call  it  illusion  since  it  partakes  of  the  eternal  sub- 
stance and  will  persist  so  long  as  the  thought  per- 
sists.    And  if  thought  is  not  real,  then  nothing  is 


Summary  of  Law  of  Impersonal  Mind     113 

real ;  and  God  is  not  real.  I  cannot  conceive  of  God 
without  thought.  What  I  conceive  is  also  His  con- 
ception, since  we  are  one ;  and  as  impersonal  mind 
He  acts  for  me  as  my  creative  power.  So  what- 
ever I  conceive  will  be  registered  on  the  screen, 
that  is,  in  my  body  and  in  my  affairs. 

Where  Faults  and  ErrcJrs  Lie. 

Now  if  the  picture  is  faulty,  what  do  we  do? 
Do  we  say  it  is  not  there,  merely  because,  we  do  not 
like  it  ?  No.  Do  we  try  to  rub  it  out  ?  No.  We 
know  that  it  is  an  effect  produced  by  an  antecedent 
cause.  So  when  bodies  are  sick,  and  poverty  shows 
its  gaunt  face,  if  we  are  wise  we  do  not  seek  the 
remedy  in  the  effect,  by  beating  the  poor  body, 
pounding,  or  drugging  it,  or  by  rushing  more  madly 
into  the  world  of  competition  and  financial  struggle 
to  right  our  affairs.  We  are  looking  to-  the  light  and 
"if  thine  eye  be  single,  thy  whole  body  shall  be  full 
of  light."  So  we  center  our  whole  thought  upon 
the  idea  with  singleness  of  purpose. 

Where,  then,  do  we  find  the  cause  of  the  inhar- 
monious picture?  Not  at  the  beginning  of  all  do 
we  find  the  error.  The  light  is  all  right;  spirit 
is  one  hundred  per  cent  perfect.  It  is  perfect  as 
substance  all  the  way  through.  There  is  only  one 
other  place  to  look  and  that  is  at  the  slide  or 
thought,  where  light  or  spirit  begins  its  transition 
into  form.  Here  we  find  the  error.  We  have  a 
faulty  image.    Our  conceptual  faculty  has  been  too 


114  Being  and  Becoming 

low.  Our  pattern  was  imperfect.  The  light  had 
to  take  the  medium  we  provided;  Spirit  or  Crea- 
tive Mind,  "shining  on  the  just  and  the  unjust" 
with  equal  impartiality,  has  passed  through  into 
manifestation.  Spirit  cannot  do  otherwise.  To  re- 
fuse its  light  to  any  one  is  to  deny  to  such  an  one 
his  individuality  or  power  of  self-choice,  and  thus 
to  defeat  its  own  ends.  For  man  is  a  purpose  of 
God;  he  is  the  object  of  Divine  love;  and  in  him 
Love  seeks  its  own  fulfillment.  So  it  must  have  the 
love  we  choose  to  give  it ;  or  it  cannot  have  love  at 
all. 

Conclusion  of  Study  of  Impersonal  Mind. 

We  have  thus  studied  the  process  of  a  demon- 
stration when  it  is  made  from  the  standpoint  of 
Law  acting  under  the  impulse  of  our  own  thought. 
In  this  method,  Mind  acts  as  the  receptive  and 
creative  agent;  but  our  own  thought  gives  it  its 
initial  movement  in  our  affairs.  Our  choice  is  all 
the  will  it  has  as  impersonal  mind.  Thus  the  en- 
lightened soul  performs  a  godlike  act  when  he  sim- 
ply proposes  to  himself  that  his  soul  shall  realize 
the  divine  mind  at  work  upon  his  problem,  and 
then  chooses  the  pattern  which  it  shall  follow  for 
his  health,  his  supply,  and  his  happiness.  When 
the  inspired  mind  of  the  individual  reaches  this 
point,  he  has  learned  how  to  pass  over  to  spirit  all 
the  weight  of  labor.  He  foregoes  all  struggle  for 
he  calmly  voices  his  idea  and  knows  that  spirit  not 


Summary  of  Law  of  Impersonal  Mind    115 

only  will  work  things  out  for  him  to  the  definite 
conclusion,  but  is  now  working  them  out.  Being  is 
becoming  manifest  for  him.      # 

What  We  Think  All  Day,  Counts. 

While  we  may  seek  moments  for  quiet  realiza- 
tion of  the  deep  things  of  life  and  for  concentrated 
thought  upon  any  idea,  yet  we  are  not  to  suppose 
that  the  attitude  of  mind  for  merely  half  an  hour 
will  determine  the  issue.  It  is  what  we  think  all 
day  that  counts ;  and  we  can  carry  on  all  the  mental 
activity  while  we  are  about  our  other  affairs,  if  we 
wish.  Our  thought  must  be  continuously  right  if 
our  manifestations  are  to  be  so.  We  cannot  ex- 
pect Being  to  continue  to  pass  through  our  thought 
into  expression  if  we  choke  up  the  channel.  To 
choke  the  channel  is  to  make  another  choice;  and 
spirit  will  begin  to  work  on  the  new  idea,  whether 
it  is  for  our  good  or  not.     w  ^i 

Finally  we  would  caution  those  who  are  always 
turning  to  the  creative  mind  for  things  only  always 
impressing  it  for  something.  There  is  nothing 
wrong  in  the  act  itself,  for  the  law  is  our  servant; 
but  its  reckless  use  may  lead  to  a  sort  of  callousness 
to  higher  emotions  and  then  degenerate  into  fakir- 
ism  or  worse.  It  may  finally  lead  to  black  magic, 
which  is  the  destructive  use  of  the  law.,  Or,  with 
even  honest  minds,  it  may  create  the  habit  of  think- 
ing of  mind  as  merely  a  delightful  grab-bag  from 
which  something  is  to  be  extracted  all  of  the  time. 


116  Being  and  Becoming 

This  is  fatal  to  the  finer  instincts ;  and  it  is  in  order 
to  avoid  this  that  we  are  told  by  no  less  a  teacher 
than  the  Great  Master,  "Seek  ye  first  the  kingdom 
of  God  and  his  righteousness;  and  all  these  things 
shall  be  added  unto  you."  In  other  words  he  recog- 
nized, as  we  must,  that  creative  mind  is  personal 
as  well  as  impersonal;  and  we  must  seek  to  align 
ourselves  with  its  onward  movement  and  higher 
purposes  if  we  are  to  realize  the  perfect  joy  of 
being.  We  have  already  considered  the  impersonal 
nature  of  mind;  let  us  in  the  succeeding  chapters 
consider  it  as  personal. 


PART  II. 

BEING  AS  THE  PERSONAL  SPIRIT. 


CHAPTER  XV. 
THE  GOD  WHO  HEARS  US. 

WE  have  all  had  experience  of  God  as  the 
Personal  Spirit.  There  is  no  one  of  us 
who  has  not  at  one  time  or  another  turned 
his  face  away  from  everything  that  earth  can  prom- 
ise or  threaten,  and  looking  up,  has  declared,  "O 
God,  all  this  is  nothing  if  there  is  not  something 
bigger  than  this  and  beyond  it."  Or  like  David, 
we  can  say  in  the  midst  of  trouble,  "I  cried  unto 
the  Lord ;  and  he  heard  me  and  delivered  me  out  of 
all  my  distress."  And  even  he  who  "cries  out 
against  God  and  dies"  has  a  sense  of  God  as  per- 
sonal, but  entirely  unjust,  responsible  for  the  pains 
he  bears. 

It  is  not  so  difficult  to  appreciate  the  personal  na- 
ture of  God  as  it  is  to  prevent  the  mistaken  idea 
that  God  acts  within  the  limits  of  human  person- 
ality as  it  is  ordinarily  conceived.  You  or  I,  for 
example,  often  feel  ourselves  impelled  by  circum- 
stances to  do  something  that  we  would  have  pre- 
ferred not  to  do.  Necessity  seemed  laid  upon  us 
though  this  really  comes  as  the  consequence  of  pre- 
vious choices.    But  God  acts  with  perfect  freedom 

119 


120  Being  and  Becoming 

though  always  within  the  law  of  His  being — that 
is,  His  choices  never  embarrass  Him  afterwards 
though  He  Himself  cannot  violate  His  own  law 
or  even  be  conceived  of  as  desiring  to  do  so.  Again 
we  have  only  a  limited  knowledge  of  things  so 
that  we  often  make  mistakes  through  the  partial- 
ness  of  our  knowledge.  This  brings  unhappiness, 
sickness,  and  poverty.  But  God  must  know  all  in- 
tuitively and  at  once.  Beginning  and  end  are  one 
with  Him.  Then  we  think  of  our  self  as  distinctly 
different  from  other  selves  and  in  a  sense  apart 
from  them  so  we  hate  some  and  love  others.  But 
God,  as  the  Absolute  Self,  must  include  us  within 
Himself  and  could  not  think  of  Himself  as  apart 
from  us  but  only  a  part  with  us.  We,  as  selves, 
have  a  sense  of  time  and  space.  In  Absolute  Be- 
ing, there  can  be  no  time  nor  space,  because  space 
denotes  that  which  is  limited,  and  time  denotes  that 
which  is  incomplete;  and  God  is  fully  conscious 
of  freedom  and  completeness. 

What  we  have  just  said  refers  to  God,  of  course, 
as  an  unique  self.  And  by  this  I  mean  a  self  that  is 
conscious  of  itself  as  a  unit.  If  God  can  think  of 
Himself  as  a  unit,  then  He  can  think  of  Himself 
as  a  person.  So  we  cannot  get  away  from  the  fact 
if  we  would,  and  we  would  not  if  we  could,  that 
God  is  He  who  has  a  heart  of  tenderness,  a  mind 
of  love,  a  nature  of  wisdom,  a  power  that  can 
execute  His  commands.     He  knows  and  loves  us. 

It  Ts  apparent,  therefore,  that  while  God  shares 


»»-  '  ■-•■• 


The  God  Who  Hears  Us  121 

in  our  experience  of  thinking,  feeling  and  willing, 
still  He  is  never  limited  as  we  are.  He  knows  all 
that  is  necessary  to  be  known  to  answer  our  every 
problem.  He  loves  us  enough  to  want  to  answer 
it.  He  has  sufficient  direct  contact  with  us  to  make 
His  will  effective.  "He  is  able  to  do  exceeding 
abundantly  above  all  we  ask  or  think,"  said  the 
Great  Apostle. 

We  must  therefore  insist  on  thinking  of  God  in 
a  complete  way,  not  in  a  partial,  for  otherwise  we 
should  return  to  the  old  way  of  attributing  to  Him 
likes  and  dislikes,  sometimes  willing  us  good  and 
at  others  sending  us  evil.  Note  these  two  .facts 
and  we  shall  avoid  further  trouble :  First,  Give  to 
God  every  attribute  of  personality  that  will  not  in- 
terfere with  His  absoluteness;  purpose,  thinking, 
willing  and  feeling  are  His :  second,  nothing  in  the 
personality  of  God  should  ever  be  construed  as  de- 
nying  personal  choice  to  the  individual;  He  be- 
comes even  more  impersonal  to  our  will  and  choice 
than  our  friends  do;  and  His  purposes  are  so  vast 
as  to  constitute  law  which  we  can  depend  upon  as 
never  opposing  a  will  to  our  ozvn.  Let  us  therefore 
mention  the  three  ways  in  which  God  is  personal 
and  how  His  personal  nature  differs  from  our  own. 

God  as  the  Personal  or  Absolute  Self. 

The  essential  qualities  of  personality  are  purpose, 
the  power  to  think,  and  the  power  to  choose.  Per- 
sonality is  often  used  to  mean  individuality  in  its 


122  Being  and  Becoming 

narrower  sense  and  to  convey  the  idea  of  charm 
of  manner  or  its  reverse.  But  its  true  meaning 
must  be  primarily  to  indicate  that  by  which  one  is 
constituted  as  a  self,  the  persistent  I,  the  ego  that 
lies  back  of  everything  I  do  and  think.  An  ego  is 
a  thinking  self.  God  is  such.  He  is  personal  in 
that  He  can  and  does  choose  what  He  shall  do,  and 
when  and  where  and  how  He  shall  do  it.  He 
conceived  the  whole  scheme  of  the  visible  crea- 
tion. He  planned  the  vast  system  of  interrelated 
worlds,  and  the  entrance  of  man  onto  the  stage  of 
human  life;  He  chose  definite  areas  within  the 
reaches  of  space  wherein  He  should  set  universes 
to  evolving,  and  suns  to  light  the  farthest  reaches 
of  time.  He  started  these  suns  on  their  ageless 
journey,  and  fed  the  universe  with  energy  to  sus- 
tain them  in  their  courses. 

It  is  quite  impossible  to  have  an  effective  im- 
personal mind  without  the  personal,  whether  it  be 
in  the  case  of  God  or  of  man,  as  we  have  already 
seen.  For  we  saw  that  it  is  of  the  nature  of  the 
impersonal  mind  to  act  only  on  the  ideas  given  to 
it.  Once  give  the  idea  or  thought  to  this  mind; 
and  it  will  take  the  suggestion  and  go  on  creating 
indefinitely.  So  persistent  is  its  activity  that  we 
may  count  on  it  from  age  to  age  and  call  it  law. 
Such  a  law  we  perceive  in  the  very  movement  of 
the  planetary  bodies  of  which  we  have  just  spoken. 
There  is  the  law  of  the  attraction  of  gravitation, 
of   centrifugal  and  centripetal    force.     These   and 


The  God  Who  Hears  Us  123 

other  laws  seem  to  be  in  the  eternal  order  or  pur- 
pose; but  they  sprang  out  of  the  personal  choice 
of  Being, at  the  beginning  of  time,  since  Creative 
or  Impersonal  Mind  can  act  only  on  the  idea  first 
presented  to  it.  In  order  to  set  its  impersonal  crea- 
tive forces  to  work,  therefore,  Spirit  had  first  to 
choose  the  ideas  and  things  It  wanted  made.  In  so 
choosing,  It  was  personal.  Thus  It  is  the  Personal 
Choosing  Self  that  presents  these  ideas  and  to  that 
extent  God  is  personal. 

It  is  for  this  reason  that  we  speak  of  the  Abso- 
lute Being  as  He.  Of  course,  the  term  is  not  de- 
signed to  indicate  gender  but  only  Person.  We 
simply  put  into  words  an  idea  through  the  best 
medium  we  have  and  speak  of  God  as  He.  Our 
inner  concept  of  father  is  not  that  of  gender,  but 
only  of  protecting  love,  and  so  we  speak  of  God 
as  our  Father.  "Our  Father  which  art  in  heaven." 
"Your  Heavenly  Father  knoweth  what  things  ye 
have  need  of  before  ye  ask  them."  "It  is  my 
Father's  good  pleasure  to  give  you  the  kingdom." 
He  is  "the  Father  of  mercies  and  the  God  of  all 
comfort."  These  are  the  words  of  inspired  seers 
who  felt  this  personal  nature  of  God  and  were 
conscious  of  the  Divine  Presence. 

Yet  right  here  we  must  'ware  the  mistake  of  the 
ages  in  endowing  God  with  those  impossible  per- 
sonal attributes  which  have  made  of  Him  a  human 
idol.  So  much  vaster  is  His  personal  self  and 
nature  than  our  own  that  to  us  all  His  acts  are  by 


124  Being  and  Becoming 

the  law  of  His  being.  He  has  set  forces  into  opera- 
tion which  are  as  impersonal  as  the  forces  of  our 
own  subliminal  self.  These  are  under  our  control 
so  far  as  we  have  the  understanding  to  use  them. 
These  forces  of  life,  love,  wisdom,  truth,  beauty, 
supply,  and  so  on,  are  God  acting  as  impersonal 
mind;  and  our  self,  acting  as  personal,  can  use 
them  even  as  God's  self,  acting  as  personal,  can 
use  them.  Moreover,  God  will  never  interfere  with 
our  use  of  them.  We  may  choose  wrongly,  and  be 
hurt;  we  may  indeed  destroy  ourselves  physically 
with  our  choice. 

In  this,  God  will  not  interfere.  We  need  never 
fear  that  His  will  is  opposed  to  our  own.  In  our 
personal  affairs,  God  does  not  will  at  all.  He  places 
the  law  at  our  disposal  and  becomes  our  wisdom  if 
we  ask  it.  He  will  not  force  His  wisdom  upon  us. 
If  a  man  ask  bread,  he  will  get  bread;  if  he  ask 
fish  he  will  get  fish ;  if  he  ask  for  a  stone,  he  will 
get  a  stone.  In  other  words,  the  personal  nature 
of  God  cannot  be  construed  into  any  concept  of 
God  which  interferes  with  our  personal  freedom 
and  choice.  And  this  the  student  should  carefully 
note.  Otherwise  he  will  have  a  fickle  deity,  not 
because  God  is  fickle  but  because  He  becomes  to 
us  a  response  to  our  thought.  If  we  think  that 
things  come  by  the  chance  good-luck  of  His  favor ; 
then  that  is  our  law;  if  on  the  other  hand  we  be- 
lieve that  He  is  not  personal  at  all,  then  the  uni- 
verse presents  to  us  a  hard  and  pitiless  mechanical 


The  God  Who  Hears  Us  125 

machine.  Let  us  recognize  in  God,  then,  the  power 
of  self -direction  and  initiation  in  the  larger  affairs 
of  His  splendid  plan  without  thinking  of  Him  as 
having,  with  respect  to  ourselves,  purposes  con- 
trary to  our  own.  In  the  matter  of  choice  and  love 
even  God  must  not  interfere,  otherwise  we  are  His 
puppets  and  unworthy  of  His  love,  and  our  love 
for  Him  is  a  hollow  dream.  He  might  as  well  love 
a  stone. 

The  Personalness  of  God. 

We  shall  find,  in  the  second  place,  that  in  God 
are  the  diffused  qualities  of  personality  from  which 
our  own  individual  ones  are  drawn.  We  could  not 
derive  them  if  they  were  not  inherently  in  Him, 
just  as  one  could  not  draw  salt  from  the  sea  unless 
it  were  there  in  solution.  There  is  no  thought  that 
has  ever  come  to  man  that  did  not  once  lie  within 
the  undifferentiated  substance  of  the  eternally  pos- 
sible. Every  word  we  utter,  every  invention  we 
make,  every  statue  we  carve,  must  lie  as  potential 
thought  or  idea  within  the  Infinite  Mind.  So  you 
and  I  could  not  have  the  personal  qualities  which 
we  have  unless  they  first  lie  latent  in  the  Divine 
and  Perfect  Life.  Whatever  qualities  we  may 
have  of  personality,  must  have  welled  up  from  the 
Infinite  Personal  Life.  Hearing,  seeing,  smelling, 
tasting,  sense  of  touch,  thinking,  feeling,  willing, 
loving,  imagining,  are  possessions  of  the  personal 
life;  but  they  emerge  from  Him  since  He  is  all. 


126  Being  and  Becoming 

So  what  Troward  calls  the  "personalness  of  Spirit" 
constitutes  the  personal  nature  of  Him  from  whom 
all  things  proceed. 

God  Individualized  as  Person. 

But  it  is  through  us  that  God  becomes  most  dis- 
tinctly personal.  He  puts  these  qualities  of  His 
"personalness"  into  each  of  us,  or  rather  He  be- 
comes each  of  us,  while  at  the  same  time  retaining 
His  powers  and  attributes.  God  rises  to  the  high- 
est self-expression  in  us.  It  is  for  this  reason  that 
any  one  of  us  might  rather  wish  to  be  what  we  are 
— God  in  the  individual — rather  than  to  be  God  in 
the  universal  sense.  For  in  our  objective,  personal 
self,  God  has  ventured  on  His  greatest  quest.  He 
is  having  the  fun  of  choice  in  the  individual  un- 
foldment  of  life  with  all  its  unknown  factors  and 
its  possible  allurements. 

We  are  therefore  distinctly  purposes  of  Being. 
For  it  is  of  the  very  essence  of  personality  to  pur- 
pose, to  initiate  and  to  select ;  and  one  does  not  start 
anything  nor  choose  it  without  relation  to  a  plan. 
Spirit,  therefore,  has  purposes  which  it  designs  to 
work  out  both  for  and  in  the  individual.  This  re- 
veals Spirit  as  acting  in  just  the  opposite  character 
of  the  Impersonal  Mind  of  which  we  have  said 
so  much.  In  that,  we  found  Being  acting  as  the 
receptive  and  creative  agent.  In  this,  we  find  it  as 
the  active  agent. 


, 


The  God  Who  Hears  Us  127 

The  Purpose  of  Spirit. 

To  deny  that  Spirit  has  purpose  and  intention  of 
its  own  is  to  lose  contact  with  It  at  Its  highest  and 
most  delightful  level,  for  to  deny  this  is  to  remove 
all  sense  of  relationship  to  that  purpose  and  thus 
to  cut  ourselves  off  from  receiving  its  benefit.  The 
purpose  of  Spirit  is  to  express — from  ex  and  primo, 
to  press  out — the  Life,  Love  and  Wisdom  which  It 
feels  within  Itself.  The  whole  end  and  aim  of 
creation  is  manifestation.  This  is  the  ultimate. 
And  the  individual  personality,  you  and  I,  play 
our  part  in  Spirit's  self-expression.  We  are  not 
apart  from,  but  a  part  of,  Its  unfoldment.  This 
beautiful  truth  reveals  man  as  playing  a  high  role 
in  Love's  fulfillment.  Ancient  is  the  saying,  "God 
made  the  world  for  his  own  enjoyment."  If  so, 
man  is  not  so  much  designed  to  use  Spirit  as  to 
be  used  of  Spirit.  Spirit  would  enjoy  Itself  in  us ; 
and  we  must  learn  our  part  in  this  great  scheme. 

The  Motive,  Love. 

We  must  first  of  all,  then,  perceive  Spirit's  pur- 
pose, if  we  are  to  work  with  It.  It  can  have  but 
one,  self-expression;  but  it  may  take  many  modes 
of  activity.  And  back  of  it  all  must  be  one  su- 
preme impulse,  love.  The  bosom  friend  of  the 
Master  says,  "Every  one  that  loveth  is  begotten 
of  God.     He  that  loveth  not,  knoweth  not  God, 


128  Being  and  Becoming 

for  God  is  love.  .  .  .  No  man  hath  beheld  God  at 
any  time:  if  we  love  one  another,  God  abideth  in 
us ;  and  His  love  is  perfected  in  us :  hereby  we 
know  that  we  abide  in  Him  and  He  in  us  because 
He  hath  given  us  of  His  Spirit."  The  presence  of 
love  then  is  a  token  of  the  indwelling  of  the  Spirit; 
and  in  the  expression  of  this  Spirit,  we  link  our- 
selves into  the  great  creative  purpose,  and  become 
one  with  the  Infinite  Life.  We  lose  all  sense  of 
separation,  and  merging  ourselves  in  the  ocean  of 
the  perfect  Life,  Love  and  Supply,  we  pass  from 
death  to  life,  from  the  cottage  to  the  palace  of 
the  King.  It  is  infinitely  worth  while  then  to 
study  Spirit  from  the  standpoint  of  Its  purpose 
and  motive. 


CHAPTER  XVL 
THE  GOD  WHO  LOVES  US. 

SPIRIT'S  motive,  we  say,  is  love.  What  is 
love?  Love  is  the  union  of  two  kindred 
things.  It  is  that  completeness  which  comes 
from  this  union.  I  care  not  where  you  look,  you 
will  find  life  incomplete  without  such  a  union.  The 
whole  visible  universe  is  but  the  outer  manifestation 
of  this  inner  principle.  It  is  shown  in  the  chemical 
affinity  of  the  atoms.  Without  this  drawing  to- 
gether of  kindred  things,  all  material  substances 
would  fly  apart  and  pass  into  chaos  and  incomplete- 
ness. In  the  vegetable  world,  we  perceive  the  pres- 
ence of  this  principle.  The  seed-bearing  plant  can- 
not give  birth  to  another  plant  until  the  female 
flower  is  fecundated  by  the  male.  Long  before  sex 
organs  were  discovered  in  the  plants,  the  ancients, 
as  in  Egypt,  recognized  the  separate  sexes  of  the 
plant.  Heroditus  says  the  Babylonians  knew  it 
and  suspended  male  clusters  of  dates  taken  from 
the  deserts  over  the  female  dates  to  fecundate 
them. 

One  does  not  need  to  illustrate  further.    All  na- 
ture proves  the  presence  of  the  principle  of  love, 

129 


130  Being  and  Becoming 

or  the  union  of  two  kindred  things  to  form  a  real 
completeness.  We  must  see  then  that  Originating 
Spirit  shares  the  nature  of  Its  Creation.  It,  too, 
must  be  Love,  for  there  cannot  be  an  expression 
without  an  expresser,  no  love  without  a  lover.  God 
is  love. 

Spirit  therefore  seeks  Its  own  completeness  by 
passing  Itself  out  into  individual  expression  in  man 
whose  first  nature  is  love  and  then  finding  Its  own 
completeness  in  enjoying  that  love.  The  motive 
of  creation  is  Spirit's  self-realization  in  love. 

Spirit  has,  consequently,  a  further  purpose, — to 
continuously  evolve  a  higher  and  still  higher  in- 
dividual upon  which  it  can  pour  out  fuller  and 
ever  fuller  measures  of  Its  love  and  life.  For 
Spirit  is  infinite  in  its  potential;  and,  having  once 
started,  it  carries  on  to  the  nth  degree.  To  learn 
how  to  swing  into  harmony  with  this  divine  pur- 
pose is  the  end  and  aim  of  all  true  teaching.  For 
once  we  are  in  the  current,  It  of  Itself  will  bear  us 
on  Its  bosom  to  those  islands  of  the  blest  where 
Love  and  Life  await  us  and  where  we  may  spend 
our  days  in  the  never-ending  joy  of  the  complete 
life  and  the  divine  companionship.  "And  I  saw  a 
new  heaven  and  a  new  earth :  for  the  first  heaven 
and  the  first  earth  are  passed  away ;  and  the  sea  is 
no  more.  And  I  saw  the  holy  city,  new  Jerusalem, 
coming  down  out  of  heaven  from  God,  made  ready 
as  a  bride  adorned  for  her  husband.  And  I  heard 
a  great  voice  out  of  the  throne,  saying,  Behold,  the 


The  God  Who  Loves  Us  131 

tabernacle  of  God  is  with  men,  and  He  shall  dwell 
with  them,  and  be  their  God;  and  He  shall  wipe 
away  every  tear  from  their  eyes:  and  death  shall 
be  no  more:  neither  shall  there  be  mourning,  nor 
crying,  nor  pain,  any  more:  the  first  things  are 
passed  away." 

This  is  a  perfect  picture  of  that  state  in  which 
man  finds  himself  when  he  is  identified  with  the 
purpose  of  Spirit.  Love  has  found  in  him  its  ful- 
fillment; and  life  has  found  its  completeness.  We 
can  escape  unhappiness,  pain,  and  poverty,  in  no 
way  so  easily  as  this — the  identification  of  our  pur- 
pose with  that  of  the  divine.  We  do  not  have  to 
struggle  nor  to  make  anything.  We  only  have  to 
be  something — at  one  with  the  Infinite  Spirit. 

Wouldst  thou  find  pardon  for  all  thy  transgression — 

Peace  from  thy  battles  and  strife? 

Make  thou  the  Peace  of  the  Lord  thy  possession, 

Make  thy  self  one  with  His  life. 

More  life,  more  life, 

Ye  who  shall  seek  it  shall  find 

More  love,  more  love, 

One  with  the  Infinite  Mind. 

Making  Our  Unity. 

The  question  then  arises,  "If  all  our  good  comes 
from  this  unity  with  life,  how  is  the  union  to  be 
accomplished  ?"  And  the  answer  is,  you  do  not 
have  to  accomplish  it;  you  only  have  to  recognize 
it.    It  already  Is.    Separation  is  only  apparent.    It 


132  Being  and  Becoming 

never  really  was  anyway.  You  have  nowhere  to 
go  outside  of  the  Infinite  Mind.  There  is  no  out- 
side.   You  only  thought  you  were  outside. 

At  the  same  time,  the  Divine  Life  and  Love  has 
no  reality  for  you  until  you  recognize  it.  "Behold 
I  stand  at  the  door  and  knock.  If  any  man  will 
open,  I  will  come  in."  You  are  the  gate-keeper; 
and  your  door  will  never  be  forced.  The  Father 
comes  out  to  meet  the  returning  prodigal;  but  He 
does  not  drive  him  in.  In  reality,  the  Son  never 
got  out  of  the  Father's  love.  He  only  thought  him- 
self out;  and  all  he  had  to  do  was  to  think  him- 
self in.    He  thus  came  to  himself. 

Our  object  then  is  to  find  our  own  completeness 
in  love,  and  to  give  Spirit  its  completeness  in  our 
love.  We  are  to  recognize  Spirit  as  love,  and  turn 
our  love-side  to  it,  not  merely  our  mind-side. 

When  this  has  been  done,  we  shall  also  find  the 
great  secret  of  healing  power.  For  if  Love,  Life, 
and  Beauty  are  the  symbols  of  completeness,  then 
their  opposite  is  incompleteness  or  the  lack  of  these 
qualities,  or  fear,  death,  ignorance,  want,  and  pain. 
Then  to  heal  disease  it  is  not  necessary  to  tinker 
with  the  effect  which  is  due  to  a  lack  of  something, 
but  to  supply  the  deficiency.  Disease  is  due  to  a 
negative  factor;  and  we  heal  it  by  supplying  the 
positive  factor — love.  This  is  the  principle  a  man 
would  act  upon  if  he  had  an  empty  reservoir.  He 
would  not  talk  about  its  emptiness,  complain  about 
its  stagnant  odor,  nor  bewail  its  unsightliness.    He 


The  God  Who  Loves  Us  133 

would  simply  open  up  the  channel  to  the  heights 
and  let  the  water  flow  in.  How  simple  the  process 
— "Let"  or  allow  the  water  to  flow  in !  The  empty- 
pool  is  filled  without  effort.  The  effect  is  changed 
by  the  cause.  How  well  the  Great  Teacher  under- 
stood this!  "On  the  last  day,  the  great  day  of 
the  feast,  Jesus  stood  and  cried,  saying,  'If  any 
man  thirst,  let  him  come  unto  me  and  drink.  He 
that  believeth  in  me,  as  the  scripture  hath  said, 
from  within  him  shall  flow  rivers  of  living  water/ 
But  this  spake  he  of  the  Spirit  which  they  that 
believed  in  him  were  to  receive."  He  is  speaking 
of  the  great  inner  self  when  he  says  "me,"  for  we 
are  expressly  told  that  he  spoke  of  it  in  relation  to 
the  Spirit.  So  we  have  a  further  picture  of  the 
glory  of  man's  nature  and  the  healing  process.  If 
any  man  will  open  the  pipes  at  the  bottom  of  the 
pool,  the  water  or  the  Spirit  will  fill  it  like  a  spring. 
The  word  "Spirit"  as  it  occurs  in  the  Greek  text 
is  "psyche"  which  also  means  "life."  If,  then,  we 
are  to  be  rid  of  death  and  disease  and  "lack,"  we 
have  only  to  let  Life  flow  in  from  the  inner  springs 
of  our  being.  And  the  touchstone  to  Divine  Life 
is  Love. 

I  breathe  the  life  and  love  of  God, 

The   spirit-raptured  air, 
And  feel  the  thrilling,  vibrant  force 

Of  Him  whose  ardent  care 
Enfills  the  whole : 
I  breathe  His  life  as  one  who  quaffs 


134  Being  and  Becoming 

From  out  the  sacred  cup, 
Who  drinks  the  wine  of  God,  the  Vine; 
For,  as  he  turns  it  up, 
God  fills  the  bowl. 

I  thrill  anew  with  health  and  peace, 

While  through  my  vejns  asurge 
There  flow  the  full-breathed  tides  of  health 

That  cleanse,  inspire,  and  purge 
From  pain  and  strife: 
I  breathe  more  deep  the  pranic  air, 

Drink  deeper  still  the  bowl; 
For  as  I  drink,  from  Life's  full  brink, 

God  fills  my  thirsty  soul 
With  His  own  life.1 


lSongs  of  the  Silence,  by  the  author. 


CHAPTER   XVII. 
THE  GOD  WHO  HEALS  US. 

LOVE  therefore  is  the  great  healing  power.  It 
is  its  absence  that  causes  incompleteness  or 
disease.  It  is  its  presence  that  causes  health 
or  wholeness.  Love  is  completeness  or  wholeness. 
And  such  completeness  or  wholeness  is  necessary 
for  both  the  soul  and  the  body.  He  who  can  ad- 
minister the  great  palliative  of  love  to  the  broken- 
spirited  serves  mankind  whether  he  succeeds  in 
restoring  the  body  or  not.  A  friend  of  mine,  a 
trained  nurse,  tells  me  of  a  case  to  which  she  was 
called.  The  physician  stated  that  there  was  no 
possibility  of  recovery  and  the  nurse  was  therefore 
to  make  the  last  days  as  comfortable  as  possible. 
The  woman  was  in  the  prime  of  life;  and  in  her 
bitterness  at  pain  and  death,  she  had  turned  even 
against  her  own  family  with  a  sort  of  hate.  The 
nurse,  being  thoroughly  acquainted  with  the  prin- 
ciples of  mental  science,  said  nothing  at  first  ex- 
cept in  a  nurse's  capacity,  but  began  at  once  to 
declare  the  presence  of  love.  She  stated  silently, 
"You  are  full  of  love ;  and  only  love  is  around  you." 
This  continued  for  several  days  at  the  end  of  which 

135 


136  Being  and  Becoming 

time  the  woman  said,  "Nurse,  you  are  good  to  me. 
I  love  you."  Shortly  after  she  said,  "I  am  so  full 
of  love.  It  seems  that  I  love  everybody."  Then 
she  and  the  nurse  had  talks  together ;  and  she  said, 
"I  know  I  am  not  going  to  get  well.  But  I  feel 
that  I  am  healed.  Do  you  think  that  anybody  could 
feel  that  way  if  they  were  going  to  die?"  "Yes,  I 
know  you  are  all  right,"  was  the  reply.  The  wo- 
man died  declaring  her  faith  and  love. 

Now  some  one  may  think  that  this  is  not  a  good 
example  of  the  healing  power  of  love;  and  yet  what 
was  it  that  the  woman  needed  first  of  all?  She 
needed  the  restoration  of  a  sense  of  wholeness,  of 
unity.  That  is  love.  And  she  needed  that  for 
whatever  plane  of  existence  upon  which  she  might 
live.  Her  very  self  seemed  restored  to  her^  There 
is  no  question  that  she  would  have  been  healed  if 
the  case  had  been  taken  before  the  idea  of  incom- 
pleteness had  taken  such  a  hold  on  the  impersonal 
mind  that  the  contrary  idea  of  health  did  not  suc- 
ceed in  supplanting  it. 

Cases  have  come  to  my  attention  or  experience 
in  which  the  thought  of  love  has  caught  up  those 
who  otherwise  would  have  passed  on,  and  restored 
them  to  the  love  and  service  of  their  families.  One 
of  our  healers  was  called  to  such  a  case  in  which 
the  woman  had  been  given  up  by  the  physician  to 
die  of  tuberculosis.  "She  has  only  four  days  to 
live,"  said  he.  With  a  divine  compassion  of  self- 
giving  which  I  have  seldom  seen  equaled,  the  healer 


The  God  Who  Heals  Us  137 

called  her  back  from  the  edge  of  the  grave;  and 
at  least  two  years  later  than  the  time  of  which  I 
speak,  I  knew  of  her  as  carrying  on  the  housework 
in  her  own  home. 

Feeling  and  Emotions. 

Let  us  consider  the  reason  why  love  plays  such 
a  divine  role  in  the  cure  of  souls  and  bodies.  *S 

We  all  understand  that  love  is  "feeling."  The 
first  nature  of  Spirit  is  feeling;  and  Its  motive  is 
to  express  this  feeling  so  that  we  often  speak  of 
First  Cause  as  Original  Feeling.  The  creative 
power  is  therefore  emotional.  We  find  the  same 
thing  true  in  the  individual.  The  subjective  facul- 
ties govern  all  the  unconscious  activities  of  the  body, 
causing  the  heart  to  beat,  the  lungs  to  expand,  tak- 
ing, in  the  life-giving  air,  building  the  new  cells  of 
the  various  organs  and  expelling  impurities.  These 
subjective  faculties  are  emotional.  The  seat  of 
the  emotions  is  not  objective;  our  objective  facul- 
ties have  only  memories  of  emotional  experiences. 
Feeling  and  emotion  are  subjective  and  creative. 
It  is  a  well-known  fact  that  it  is  not  the*  "holding 
of  a  thought"  that  heals;  it  is  the  feeling  that  ac- 
companies the  thought.  How  often  we  have  noted 
the  physical  change  accompanying  strong  feeling. 
An  angry  man  grows  red  in  the  face.  A  fright- 
ened one  turns  white.  His  hair  stands  on  end,  his 
flesh  creeps.  Brave  men  tell  us  that  this  happens 
even  in  the  case  of  those  whose  will  still  drives 


138  Being  and  Becoming 

them  bravely  forward.  One  of  Napoleon's  staff 
said  to  him  of  a  certain  officer,  "Did  you  see  how- 
pale  he  turned  when  you  gave  .him  his  orders?" 
"Yes,"  replied  Napoleon,  "but  he  will  nevertheless 
do  his  duty." 

Colossal  hidden  energies  reveal  themselves  under    i^V* 
the  stress  of  strong  emotion.      Many  cases  have 
been  cited  in  which  some  crippled  person  has  risen 
from  his  bed  and  accomplished  prodigious  deeds, 
as  in  cases  of  fire  where  the  need  was  imperatives^" 

On  the  constructive  plane,  the  same  process  oc- 
curs both  in  the  individual  and  universal  creation. 
An  idea  is  taken  into  the  mind.  The  strong  emo- 
tional creative  forces  play  upon  it  and  build  on 
the  model;  and  our  greatest  ideal  passes  out  of 
thought  into  real  expression.  ,  It  is  thus  through 
feeling  that  the  ideal  becomes  the  real.  It  is  through 
love  that  the  word  becomes  flesh  and  dwells  among 
us.  This  was  the  understanding  of  the  poet  who 
wrote : 

"One  thing  shines  clear  in  our  heart's  sweet  reason,  - — "• 
One  light  that  over  the  chasm  runs,  — » 

That  to  turn  from  love  is  the  world's  one  treason,     - — - 
And  treads  down  all  the  suns/^ 


The  Creative  Faculty,  Love. 

Right  here  is  where  so  many  fail  of  results.  They 
get  the  right  thought  but  not  the  feeling.  They 
have  an  intellectual  persuasion  but  not  an  emo- 
tional.   They  do  not  feel  its  truth.    No  song  sings 


The  God  Who  Heals  Us  139 

itself  in  the  heart.     No  pulse  beats  warmer.     NoN 
surge  of  joy  breaks  on  the  shore.     Not  that  one 
must  lose  intellectual  balance,  for  there  is  nothing 
unnatural    about    feeling;    feeling    is    normal    and 
divine. 

But  we  do  not  need  to  "work  up"  love  from 
somewhere.  The  heart  that  goes  out  in  natural 
expression  to  find  completeness  in  another  or  in 
the  Originating  Feeling  Itself,  goes  because  it  re- 
joices to  go,  gives  because  it  is  glad  to  give.  It 
does  not  calculate  on  return.  It  is  not  seeking 
something;  it  is  simply  being  its  true  self.  The 
great  loving,  compassionate  heart  of  the  Master 
Healer  drew  men  unto  him,  and  made  him  the 
great  healer  that  he  was.  He  did  not  love  men  in 
order  to  heal  them:  he  healed  them  because  he 
loved  them.  Healing  was  not  an  aim  but  an  inevit- 
able result.  Healing  is  a  by-product  of  conscious- 
ness. The  illumined  mind  heals  because  in  ex- 
pressing love  it  also  acts  creatively.  The  creative 
faculty,  therefore,  is  love  or  feeling.  The  great- 
est healers  to-day  are  those  who,  out  of  a  great 
love  for  folks,  are  willing  and  eager  to  help  them 
untangle  all  the  snarls  of  life,  and  say  to  the  trou- 
bled waters  of  their  souls,  "Peace,  be  still."  Disin- 
terested affection  is  divine.     Self-giving  is  godlike. 

"I  built  a  chimney  for  a-  comrade  old, 
I  did  the  service  without  hope  of  hire, 
And  wandered  on  through  winters  cold 
Yet  all  the  day  /  rest  before  the  fire." 


140  Being  and  Becoming 

We  thus  see  that  love  finds  its  own  completeness 
in  self-giving.  The  Master  Teacher  further  illus- 
trated this  principle  by  saying,  "He  who  would  save 
his  life  shall  lose  it;  but  he  who  will  lose  his  life 
for  my  sake  [for  the  sake  of  love]  the  same  shall 
find  it."  Love  is  complete  only  in  expression,  never 
in  holding  it  back.  Life  is  fully  realized  only  as 
we  love.  One  can  see  this  so  often  illustrated  in 
great-hearted  men  and  women  who  have  applied 
this  truth.  Love  being  the  finest  and  most  harmo- 
nious of  all  vibrations  has  worked  a  very  miracle 
of  change  in  the  fine  molecular  structure  of  the 
flesh.  Radiant  health  flushes  to  the  overflowing 
banks  of  life.  The  smile  of  such  a  person  is  a 
blessing;  and  his  laugh  a  delightful  contagion. 

This  then  is  the  result  of  true  feeling;  it  is  an 
end,  not  an.  aim.  Love  has  its  own  rewards  in 
love.  Love  is  worth  while  for  its  own  sake. 
"Love  is  the  fulfillment  of  the  law."  It  is  fulfill- 
ment or  completeness  without  which  life  falls  into 
elemental  chaos.  So  Spirit  seeks  Its  own  complete- 
ness in  making  its  union  with  that  other  self  within 
it.  The  question,  therefore,  is  the  one  already 
asked — how  can  we  cooperate  in  the  work  of  Spirit? 
The  answer  we  shall  find  in  the  next  chapter. 


CHAPTER    XVIII. 

THE  MYSTIC  UNION,  OR  HOW  TO 
REALIZE  THE  PRESENCE. 

LIFE  finds  its  completeness  only  when  the  full 
purpose  of  Spirit  is  accomplished  through 
us.  It  seeks  an  object  worthy  of  its  affec- 
tions. Being  passes  out  of  the  Absolute  into  the 
individual  and  becomes  you  and  me  that  it  may 
find  such  an  object.  For  outside  itself,  it  would 
be  impossible  to  find  it,  since  God  is  all.  Man  is 
therefore  born  for  love.  Human  life  can  never  be 
complete  without  the  union  of  the  individual  con- 
sciousness with  the  universal.  The  final  search  of 
the  soul  must  therefore  be  for  this  wholeness  of 
being.  It  is  this  wholeness  that  we  are  all  after, 
whether  we  express  it  in  one  term  or  another. 
Even  he  who  seeks  for  things,  instinctively  recog- 
nizes that  they  follow  after  the  consciousness  of 
unity ;  they  never  precede  it.  We  must  harmonize 
with  Spirit  before  It  can  work  effectively  through 
us.  But  in  addition  to  the  general  consciousness  of 
the  Divine  Unity,  there  is  the  craving  of  every 
natural  man  for  a  personal  sense  of  relationship 
with  God,     The  quest  is  a  personal  one.     As  the 

141 


142  Being  and  Becoming 

mystics  have  said,  "It  is  the  flight  of  the  alone 
to  the  Alone." 

To  cooperate  with  Spirit  in  fulfilling  its  design 
of  ever  higher  self-expression,  it  becomes  necessary 
for  us  to  move  toward  It  as  well  as  It  to  move  to- 
ward us.  Love  on  our  part  can  mean  nothing  un- 
less it  is  spontaneous.  Spirit  cannot  force  us  to 
love.  It  cannot  force  us  to  cooperate.  In  the 
mechanical  creation,  everything  can  be  made  to  be 
obedient  to  law.  To  man  alone  is  given  the  power 
to  disobey.  To  him  alone  belongs  this  high  power 
of  deliberate  choice.  He  can  give  or  withhold. 
To  be  sure  he  himself  is  incomplete  so  long  as  he 
withholds,  with  an  incompleteness  or  unwholesome- 
ness  that  results  in  limitation,  sickness  and  death. 

Man  holds  therefore  a  glorious  freedom,  to 
choose  his  own  pathway.  And  it  is  when  he  volun- 
tarily surrenders  his  heart  in  loving  union  with  the 
Spirit  that  he  gives  It  a  unique  pleasure.  In  this 
sense,  man  himself  becomes  necessary  to  Spirit's 
own  enjoyment.  So  while  man  may  stand  aloof ; 
yet  if  he  does  so,  he  must  suffer  from  incomplete- 
ness, which,  being  the  reverse  of  completeness  or 
good,  is  evil.  On  the  contrary,  if  he  chooses  to 
find  unity  with  Spirit,  he  will  find  with  it  that 
peace,  poise,  and  contentment  which  rises  out  of 
his  wholesomeness.  And  this  which  comes  to  him 
comes  not  as  the  end  to  be  sought  but  as  universal 
plus  which  is  added  by  creative  mind  to  our  re- 


How  to  Realize  the  Presence  143 

ward — "seek  ye  first  the  kingdom — and,  all  these 
things  shall  be  added." 

It  must  be,  therefore,  the  spontaneous  activity 
of  the  heart  seeking  its  own  completeness  in  self- 
giving — in  the  loss  of  self  to  find  it  in  the  Greater 
Self. 

Through  the  Silence  to  the  Center. 

We  must  realize,  first  of  all,  that  we  are  in  the 
quest  of  wholeness.  Everything  that  we  see  and 
most  that  we  experience  is  related  to  something  else. 
Everything  is  an  exhibit  of  parts.  We  are  to  strive 
to  enter  into  a  feeling  of  the  essence  from  which 
all  this  multiplicity  proceeds.  We  are  after  an  at- 
one-ment  with  the  Absolute.  This  can  never  be 
secured  objectively,  but  only  within  where  the  rela- 
tionships of  things  find  their  relator.  We  must  pass 
by  the  portals  of  sense,  beyond  thought  into  feeling. 
The  mystic  consciousness  "may  be  gotten  by  love, 
but  by  thought,  never."  It  is  in  the  realm  of  the 
intuitions  that  we  find  the  More-than-Self,  the 
Proofless  Proof  of  life.  Here  is  the  Light  Eter- 
nal. Once  a  skeptic  friend  came  to  the  great  spir- 
itual leader,  Debendranath  Tagore,  the  father  of 
the  poet,  and  said,  "You  talk  of  God,  ever  and 
again  of  God!  What  proof  is  there  that  there  is  a 
God  at  all?"  Tagore  pointed  to  a  light  and  asked 
his  friend,  "Do  you  know  what  that  is?"  "Light, 
of  course."     "How  do  you  know  that  there  is  a 


144  Being  and  Becoming 

light  there?"  "I  see  it;  it  needs  no  proof;  it  is 
self-evident."  "So  is  the  existence  of  God.  I  see 
Him  within  and  without  me,  in  everything  and 
through  everything;  and  it  needs  no  proof:  it  is 
self-evident." 

In  the  silence,  one  is  not  after  proofs,  but  only 
after  that  which  to  the  soul  will  be  self-evident,  a 
vision  of  the  All,  and,  finally,  union  with  the  AIL 
And,  as  the  very  climax  of  life  is  reached  when  we 
can  on  the  one  hand  express  in  the  world  of  the 
relative,  and  on  the  other,  be  conscious  of  the 
wholeness  of  the  self,  let  us  not  be  disturbed  if  it 
takes  time  fully  to  realize  ourselves  in  either  direc- 
tion. We  must  find  our  place  in  both  worlds,  the 
outer  and  the  inner.  At  the  same  time,  most  of  us 
get  so  tangled  up  in  the  world  of  effects  that  it. 
takes  effort  to  move  into  the  world  of  cause. 

Concentration  and  Meditation. 

The  first  step,1  therefore,  to  the  mystic  conscious- 
ness, is  concentration.  We  must  bring  the  mind  to 
one  point  of  interest  and  keep  it  there.  Our  pur- 
pose is  to  center  the  mind  exclusively  on  the  de- 
sired object,  the  recognition  and  realization  of  the 
Divine  Presence.  To  this  end,  we  may,  if  we  wish, 
make  statements  leading  in  this  direction.  "I  affirm 
the  oneness  of  Being  and  my  unity  with  the  All." 
"The  Father  and  I  are  one."    "I  am  entering  into 


^he  five  steps  mentioned  here  are  similar  to   Miss  Underwood's 
analysis   of   the   mystic's   consciousness.      See   Mysticism. 


How  to  Realize  the  Presence  145 

the  secret  place  of  the  Most  High  where  I  may 
abide  under  the  shadow  of  the  Almighty."  "I 
know  and  believe  in  the  love  which  God  hath  in 
me.  God  is  love;  and  he  that  abideth  in  love, 
abideth  in  God  and  God  abideth  in  him."  "There 
is  no  fear  in  love :  but  perfect  love  casteth  out  fear, 
because  fear  hath  punishment ;  and  he  that  f eareth 
is  not  made  perfect  in  love."  "We  love  because 
He  first  loved  us."  "I  am  not  alone,  but  I  and 
the  Father  that  sent  me."  "If  I  know  myself,  I 
know  the  Father  also.  From  henceforth,  I  know 
him  and  have  seen  him."  "The  Father  loves  me." 
"Father,  I  have  glorified  thy  name  and  will  glorify 
it."  "Thou,  the  Spirit  of  Truth  art  now  come,  and 
dost  guide  me  into  all  truth ;  and  Thou  dost  declare 
Thyself  unto  me."  "O  righteous  Father,  I  know 
thee,  because  thou  art  my  Greater  Self  revealed" 

One-Pointedness. 

Let  me  say  here  that  these  and  similar  statements 
which  we  all  will  make  as  expressing  our  deter- 
mination to  know  God  and  to  realize  Him  are  not 
to  be  made  merely  at  some  stated  time;  nor  are 
we  to  seek  this  realization  for  the  moment  only- 
We  must  continuously  practice  the  idea  of  a  Real 
and  Vital  Presence.  We  find  this  wonderfully  ac- 
complished in  the  life  of  Brother  Lawrence,  the 
Medieval  Saint.  He  claimed  that  "the  practice  of 
the  presence  of  God  is  the  greatest  rule  for  a  holy 
life."     His   wandering  thoughts   were   again   and 


146  Being  and  Becoming 

again  brought  back  to   the  one-pointed   desire  to 
realize  the  presence. 

It  is  this  fixity  of  purpose  or  mono-ideaism  that 
strongly  impresses  itself  upon  the  field  of  the  inner 
consciousness  where  there  is  complete  realization  of 
the  connection  between  the  self  and  God.  Unity 
with  the  Absolute  can  be  had  only  by  determined 
desire  and  the  continuous  subjection  of  the  mind 
to  this  one  idea,  "that  I  may  know  Him."  Gradu- 
ally we  shall  be  enabled  to  withdraw  from  conscious- 
ness of  the  relative,  more  and  more  into  the  quiet 
state  of  mind  in  which  the  Voice  can  speak  to  us. 
By  maintaining  this  attitude  of  expectancy,  the 
mind  is  at  length  brought  to  a  certain  poised  calm 
which  the  mystic  has  called  the  "quiet  of  the  soul." 

The  Quiet  of  the  Soul. 

By  a  proper  efifort  of  will,  the  mind  can  be 
brought  into  a  quiescent  state  wherein  the  busy 
call  of  earth  is  stilled;  and  the  noise  and  clatter 
of  sense  is  forgotten. 

The  wild  throbbing  pulse  of  my  spirit 
So  troubled  with  earth's  din  and  strife 
Is  stilled  in  the  presence  of  stillness; 
Serene  in  this  temple-like  place, 
A  peace  seems  to  press  all  around  me 
And  hold  me  in  loving  embrace. 

Having  reached  this  delightful  solitude  of  the 
soul,  many  mistake  it  for  the  ultimate,  and  there 
rest  in  the  untroubled  sea  of  silence.     They  are 


How  to  Realize  the  Presence  147 

however  still  only  in  a  mental  state.  Yet  some  be- 
lieve themselves  to  be  already  "in  the  silence," 
and  seek  to  do  the  work  of  healing  on  this  plane. 
But  the  great  healing  power  is  not  found  here. 
Nor  is  the  true  mystic  after  quiescence ;  he  is  after 
realization.  So  he  passes  through  the  antechamber 
into  the  temple. 

Actual  Perception  of  Being. 

The  stillness  is  but  the  atmosphere  in  which  Spirit 
speaks  to  us,  for  it  is  impossible  to  "hear  the  voice 
of  gentle  stillness,"  when  the  sense-life  is  making 
its  call  upon  our  attention.  The  heart  can  now  be- 
come entirely  absorbed  in  the  joyful  perception  of 
God  and  real  communion  with  the  Absolute.  We 
feel  Him  not  as  a  part  but  as  a  Whole,  The 
Psalms  reflect  this  feeling.  Take  for  example  the 
Sixty-third  Psalm  of  David. 

"O  God,  thou  art  my  God,  earnestly  will  I  seek  thee : 

My  soul  thirsteth  for  thee,  my  flesh  longeth  for  thee 

In  a  dry  and  weary  land  where  no  water  is. 

So  have  I  looked  upon  thee  in  the  sanctuary, 

To  see  thy  power  and  thy  glory, 

Because  thy  loving  kindness  is  better  than  life; 

My  life  shall  praise  thee. 

So  will  I  bless  thee  while  I  live: 

I  will  lift  up  my  hands  in  thy  name. 

My  soul  shall  be  blessed  as  with  rich  living; 

And  my  mouth  shall  praise  thee  with  joyful  lips, 

When  I  remember  thee  upon  my  couch 

And  meditate  on  thee  in  the  night  watches." 


148  Being  and  Becoming 

"When  I  meditate  on  thee  in  the  night  watches," 
— this  is  contemplation.  How  expressive  this  senj 
tence !  The  music  is  stilled ;  the  harpist  has  dozed 
away  into  f  orgetfulness ;  and  all  the  palace  lies 
asleep,  save  the  king  who  "meditates  in  the  night 
watches."  What  are  his  meditations?  To  each  is 
given  his  vision.  But  each  in  his  own  way  per- 
ceives the  Presence,  beholds  the  Infinite  Whole. 
Emotion  runs  scale  after  scale  on  the  chords  of 
being.  Some  pass  into  ecstasies,  some  have  visions, 
some  like  Saint  Theresa  and  Saint  Katharine  of 
Siena  swoon  into  ecstatic  sleep,  to  wake  to  won- 
der and  to  power  of  service. 

But  we  are  not  to  suppose  that  the  phenomenal 
experience  is  necessary  to  the  full  enjoyment  of 
God.  It  is  indeed  a  delight  to  feel  the  full  joy  of 
the  Divine  Companionship  sweep  over  us ;  and  this 
experience  can  become  the  possession  of  all.  Every- 
where is  God ;  and  we  may  abide  in  Him.  One  can- 
not be  lonely,  for  there  is  no  place  apart  from  Him. 
We  do  not  carry  the  burden  alone  for  He  will  help 
us  to  bear  it.  Sorrow  can  be  but  for  the  moment, 
for  within  is  the  everlasting  joy  seeking  to  burst 
out  and  flood  the  soul.  Fear  must  step  from  the 
pathway,  for  in  God  is  our  divine  protection;  and 
no  evil  can  come  to  the  heart  that  trusts  in  Him. 
"Fear  not,  for  I  have  redeemed  thee ;  I  have  called 
thee  by  thy  name;  thou  art  mine.  When  thou 
passest  through  the  waters,  I  will  be  with  thee ;  and 
through  the  rivers,  they  shall  not  overflow  thee: 


How  to  Realize  the  Presence  149 

when  thou  walkest  through  the  fire,  thou  shalt  not 
be  burned,  neither  shall  the  flame  kindle  upon  thee. 
For  I  am  Jehovah,  thy  God,  the  Holy  One  of  Israel, 
Thy  Saviour."  On  every  hand  is  the  All-Good ;  and 
He  is  there  holding  limitless  resources  in  His  hand. 
"His  arm  is  not  shortened  that  it  cannot  save." 
All  else  may  fail;  but  God  cannot  fail.  The  sky 
may  darken,  but  within  the  shadow  still  we  may 
feel  the  guiding  hand.  Friends  may  desert  us ;  but 
"when  my  father  and  mother  forsake  me,  then 
the  Lord  will  take  me  up."  Plans  may  go  wrong, 
but  the  Divine  and  perfect  pattern  still  remains. 
The  thread  may  tangle  for  a  moment  in  the  warp 
or  woof  of  life;  but  the  final  fabric  will  still  be 
woven ;  and  we  shall  receive  each  his  wage  for  the 
work  he  has  done.  Life  is  endless;  and  what  fails 
in  one  place  must  yet  succeed  in  another.  For 
my  part,  I  am  sure  that  there  can  be  no  ultimate 
failure,  for  whatever  the  heart  may  crave  exists 
perfect  somewhere;  and  we  shall  succeed  in  every 
venture.  We  dare  to  trust  to  the  long  vision  and 
believe  in  the  final  outcome  of  all,  because  we  are 
in  union  with  the  Perfect  Life  and  move  on  to  per- 
fect ends.  In  our  becoming,  in  our  self-expression, 
-we  may  at  times  work  with  faulty  hands ;  but  the 
Master  Architect  will  find  a  place  for  each  man's 
►  work ;  and  the  Ultimate  of  Being  in  us  will  at  length 
express  its  perfection. 

And  for  us  the  reward  is  sure  for  it  is  the  reward 
of  love. 


ISO  Being  and  Becoming 

"And  only  the  Master  shall  praise  them, 

And  only  the  Master  shall  blame; 
And  no  one  shall  work  for  money, 

And  no  one  shall  work  for  fame : 
But  each  for  the  joy  of  the  working, 

And   each  in  his  separate   star, 
Shall  draw  the  thing  as  he  sees  it 

For  the  God  of  things  as  they  are." 

Thus  all  labor  is  a  labor  of  love,  and  receives 
the  due  recognition — the  immaculate  approval  of 
one's  own  soul,  and  the  blessing1  of  him  whose 
eye  notes  every  sparrow  that  glides  through  the 
silent  blue. 

But  in  the  mystic  contemplation  of  God,  the 
mind  is  not  filled  either  with  the  thought  of  evil  or 
of  good,  of  fear  or  of  faith.  It  is  filled  only  with 
the  exquisite  consciousness  of  the  Presence.  The 
consciousness  represented  by  this  experience  which 
we  call  perception  or  contemplation  usually  remains 
with  one  as  the  satisfying  ultimate,  the  goal  of  the 
soul,  for  a  long  period  of  time.  It  seems  joy 
enough  to  know  and  feel  the  Presence  of  the  All. 
Yet  this  is  not  the  ultimate  of  the  possible  experi- 
ence; and  in  time  there  is  a  craving  for  a  more 
vital  one.  We  desire  not  only  to  know  All  or  see 
All ;  we  desire  unity  with  the  All. 


CHAPTER  XIX 

THE  MYSTIC  UNION— THE  SOUL'S  DARK 
HOUR— THE  LIGHT  ETERNAL. 

IT  is  usually  at  this  point  in  our  experience  that 
we  have  the  dark  hours;  for  in  letting  go  of 
that  which  has  heretofore  filled  our  lives  in 
order  to  grasp  a  greater  reality,  we  seem  often  to 
lose  our  grip  on  all  and  to  go  flying  far  in  endless 
space.  I  think  this  is  quite  a  common  experience 
of  those  of  nobler  sort  who  are  passing  out  of 
the  old  order  of  religious  thought  into  the  new. 
They  have  had  a  real  and  vital  experience  with 
God.  They  have  "known  Him  in  whom  they  have 
believed ;"  they  have  through  intensity  of  interest 
reached  the  stage  of  a  true  contemplation  of  God; 
and  it  is  for  that  very  reason  that  they  have  launched 
out  into  the  deep.  It  is  at  this  point  that  they  come 
into  the  fellowship  of  the  New  Order  seeking 
higher  experience.  But  whether  they  are  in  the 
old  order  or  the  new,  the  period  of  transition  is 
often  very  painful.  Of  necessity,  the  concept  of 
God  must  be  entirely  changed,  often  enlarged ;  and 
we  become  space- wanderers.  Some  I  have  seen 
who  have  apparently  lost  themselves  in  the  very 

151 


152  Being  and  Becoming 

vastness  of  Truth.  The  concept  of  a  manlike  God 
has  been  discarded.  The  new  understanding  of 
the  personal  nature  of  God  is  not  yet  made  clear. 
One  is  lost  on  a  psychic  sea.  One  is  dazed  by  the 
effort  to  take  bearings  in  the  wide  vistas  of  the  im- 
personal mind.  Prayer  is  frequently  given  up,  be- 
cause one  does  not  pray  to  Law:  one  orders  it, 
one  does  not  entreat  it.  In  former  days,  we  begged 
favors  of  God  and  hoped  that  He  would  grant 
them.  Now  we  see  that  we  get  what  we  want  by 
expecting  it  enough!  We  choose  what  we  want; 
we  believe  in  it ;  we  take  it.  Where  does  God  come 
in?  He  seems  rather  a  supernumerary  in  this  new 
order  until  we  suddenly  discover  that  it  is  not  things 
we  want,  but  God,  Or  if  it  is  God  that  we  have 
wanted  right  along,  we  at  length  find  that  He  can 
be  had  for  the  asking. 

"Bubbles  we  earn  with  a  whole  soul's  tasking, 
'Tis  heaven  alone  that  is  given  away, 
'Tis  only  God  can  be  had  for  the  asking." 

Most  of  us  have  had  this  experience  in  one  form 
or  another.  We  have  lost  our  one-time  joy,  and 
have  passed  into  the  shadow.  "Why,"  we  ask,  "do 
I  pass  into  this  depression?  I  have  seen  the 
heavens  open.  I  have  been  on  the  sunlit  sum- 
mits. Now  I  move  in  darkness ;  and  I  cannot  see." 
Sometimes  the  worse  appears  the  better  reason : 
"The  things  I  would,  I  do  not ;  the  things  I  would 
not,  those  I  do;  and  there  is  no  health  in  me."    Life 


The  Soul's  Dark  Hour  153 

runs  to  counter  currents ;  and  one  moves  out  of 
error  into  mistakes. 

Well,  this  is  the  dark  hour  of  the  soul,  indeed; 
but  it  must  pass.  And  in  the  darkness  we  hear  a 
voice,  "Lo,  I  am  with  you  alway  even  unto  the 
end  of  the  earth."  And  again,  "Heaven  and  earth 
shall  pass  away;  but  my  word  shall  never  pass 
away."  "I  will  send  the  Comforter  unto  you.  He 
shall  teach  you  all  things  and  guide  you  in  the  way 
of  truth."  These  dark  experiences  of  the  soul  may 
be  short-cut  by  the  use  of  the  Law  for  it  gives  back 
to  us  in  form  what  we  give  to  it  in  idea,  and  mani- 
fests according  to  our  demand.  Boldly  declare 
therefore,  "The  Law  of  Life  and  Mind  makes  for 
me  just  what  I  demand.  Let  the  true  understand- 
ing of  God  be  revealed  to  me.  Let  life  put  me  on 
the  path  of  truth."  And  the  last  great  surge  of 
the  sea  shall  cast  your  frail  bark  on  the  golden 
sands  of  God! 

A  Treatment  in  the  "Dark  Hour." 

To  help  you  to  realize  this  vision  and  this  union, 
I  have  prepared  the  following  statement  of  Truth : 
I  abide  in  the  conscious  Presence  of  Spirit.  I  am 
enclosed  in  the  life  of  the  Infinite.  I  am  encircled 
by  the  Ever-loving,  Ever-living  Joy  of  Being.  I 
draw  upon  the  limitless  resources  of  God.  I  am 
sustained  and  strengthened  by  eternal  forces.  The 
love  of  my  Father  presses  in  on  me  on  every  hand. 
I  stand  on  the  Rock  of  Ages.    The  strength  of  the 


154  Being  and  Becoming 

hills  is  His  also ;  and  it  is  mine.  Thou  Ever-Pres- 
ent One,  Thou  art  my  life  and  my  supply.  I  re- 
joice in  Thee  for  there  is  fullness  of  joy  where 
Thou  art.  I  cannot  for  one  moment  be  outside  Thy 
presence  and  Thy  care.  Thou  art  always  every- 
where; and  there  is  no  place  where  Thou  art  not. 
I  cannot  be  forgotten  in  Thy^nmd;  I  cannot  be 
lost  from  Thy  consciousness,  for  Thou  art  the  One 
and  only  Mind  in  which  all  things  and  thoughts 
exist.  I  cannot  be  separated  from  Thee  for  Thou 
art  the  Whole  and  there  are  no  parts  without  nor 
within.  I  will  no  longer  think  of  myself  as  lost  nor 
estranged  from  Thee.  I  will  not  believe  that  Thou 
art  angry  with  me,  or  condemning  me.  Thou  art 
loving  me.  Even  though  my  father  and  mother 
forsake  me,  Thou  wilt  take  me  up. 

For  Thou  art  love.  I  abide  in  thy  love.  I  rest 
in  it.  I  breathe  its  air ;  I  feel  its  warmth.  I  know 
its  joy. 

"From  love  to  light,  O  wonderful  the  way 
That  leads  from  darkness  to  the  perfect  day: 

From  darkness  and  from  sorrow  of  the  night 
To  morning  that  comes  singing  o'er  the  sea. 

From  love  to  light.    From  light,  O  God,  to  Thee, 
Who  art  the  Love  of  loves,  the  eternal  Light  of  light!" 

Then  fear  not  the  darkness,  for  if  thine  eye  be 
single,  thy  whole  body  shall  at  length  be  full  of 
light.  Thou  shalt  find  the  Rock  of  Ages  arid  stand 
on  it. 


The  Soul's  Dark  Hour  155 

The  Union  Completed,  or  the  "Unified  Life." 

The  onrush  of  the  soul  at  last  brings  it  into  the 
final  harbor— "the  unified  life,"  the  "deified  life," 
where  we  can  say,  "I  and  the  Father  are  One." 
Here  the  experience  is  quite  different  from  that 
in  "meditation."  There  we  only  meditated  upon 
God  as  All ;  here  we  find  ourselves,  not  as  one  with- 
out, looking  on,  beholding  some  one  apart  from  us, 
but  as  one  within,  merged  in  the  Divine  Life.  Nor 
is  it  a  sentiment,  a  pretty  figure  of  speech.  It  is 
not  a  philosophic  statement  of  being;  it  is  spiritual 
realization  or  feeling  of  Ultimate  Reality. 

This,  then,  is  the  very  goal  toward  which  we 
have  been  struggling — the  feeling  of  Ultimate  Real- 
ity. We  have  been  trying  to  make  our  union  with 
It.  Returning  thus  to  our  query,  "How  can  we  co- 
operate in  the  work  of  Spirit,"  we  reply,  "By  mak- 
ing our  union  with  it  in  divine  self-giving."  It 
seeks  completeness  in  love,  for  love  is  the  union  of 
two  kindred  things;  but  It  cannot  find  this  com- 
pleteness without  our  cooperation.  "God  is  Spirit ; 
and  they  that  worship  him,  must  worship  him  in 
spirit  and  in  truth,  for  such  the  Father  seeketh,  to 
be  his  worshipers."  He  does  not  force.  Here  God 
must  stand  and  wait.  We  must  unbar  our  own 
door. 

Being. 

To  come  into  this  consciousness  of  at-one-ment 


156  Being  and  Becoming 

with  Spirit  is  to  come  into  the  realization  of  being. 
Life  cannot  be  complete  until  we  realize  ourselves 
as  being  and  enjoy  it.  This  is  not  the  Being  of 
God — the  "Greater  I  Am;"  nor  my  being — the 
"lesser  I  Am ;"  but  it  is  the  realization  of  myself  in 
God.  The  Greater  I  Am  is  Absolute  or  Undif- 
ferentiated Being  without  individual  realization. 
The  lesser  I  Am  is  the  individual  without  recogni- 
tion of  its  absolute  relationship.  The  developed 
consciousness  is  the  realization  of  the  self  in  Spirit 
so  that  we  can  say  as  the  Great  Teacher  said,  "All 
power  is  given  unto  me." 

Becoming. 

We  thus  reproduce  in  ourselves  a  new  center  of 
intensified  consciousness,  really  a  new  starting  point 
for  spirit  in  its  own-  self-expression.  We  must 
never  lose  sight  of  the  fact  that  Spirit  through  us 
is  seeking  self-expression,  and  has  high  purposes  if 
we  will  cooperate.  We  have  no  higher  purposes 
for  ourselves  than  It  has  for  us  and  through  us. 
Cooperating  with  It,  we  have  Its  infinite  power, 
wisdom,  and  love  to  work  with. 

We  must  remember,  too,  that  Spirit  is  seeking 
self-expression  through  manifestation.  Spirit  is 
always  passing  out  of  being  into  becoming.  If  we 
are  its  highest  point  of  departure  for  new  manifes- 
tations, then  being  will  become  or  manifest  through 
us  into  its  highest  form,  if  we  will  allow  it. 


CHAPTER  XX. 

INTUITION,  OR  THE  HIGHER  WISDOM 
OF  THE  UNIFIED  LIFE. 

SPIRIT  is  seeking  through  us  its  own  self- 
expression.  To  be  in  harmony  with  Its  pur- 
poses, is  to  assure  the  success  of  our  own; 
for  what  we  want  It  wants  for  us.  I  suppose  that 
the  full  significance  of  this  cannot  be  fully  appre- 
ciated by  any  of  us  at  first.  But  it  means  no  less 
than  that  Spirit  will  pass  through  us  into  health  of 
body,  wisdom  in  affairs,  plenty  in  possessions,  hap- 
piness, and  a  true  greatness. 

How  then  are  we  to  keep  in  harmony  with  Its 
purposes?  Retaining  firm  grasp  on  the  fact  that 
Its  purposes  are  general  while  ours  are  specific,  we 
must  realize  that  what  we  are  after  is  some  way 
by  which  we  keep  from  making  the  mistaken 
choices  which  lead  inevitably  to  disaster  and  inhar- 
mony.  And  this  way  is  provided  in  the  very  fabric 
of  the  law  which  we  have  been  studying.  If  we 
do  not  know  the  right  choice  to  make,  Spirit,  as 
the  infinite  Wisdom,  will  help  us  to  make  it.  If  we 
do  not  know  the  form  which  it  should  assume, 
Spirit  does  know.  "The  Father  knoweth  what 
things  ye  have  need  of  before  ye  ask  them." 

157 


158  Being  and  Becoming 

Here  we  pass  into  direct  consideration  of  Spirit 
from  the  opposite  standpoint  of  the  use  of  the  law, 
from  that  in  which  we  made  choices  and  presented 
them  to  impersonal  mind  to  create  for  us.  In  that 
phase  of  Spirit,  It  is  receptive,  passive  and  creative ; 
and  we  direct  its  forces.  In  this,  we  find  Spirit  as 
the  active,  formative,  sending  agent.  The  former 
we  have  illustrated  by  the  use  of  the  stereopticon. 
This  we  can  best  illustrate  on  the  principle  of  the 
camera. 

Illustration  of  Use  of  Intuitive. 

The  mind  of  the  individual  who  is  seeking  guid- 
ance or  impression  of  idea  from  the  Guiding  Wis- 
dom is  represented  by  the  film,  which  is  free  as 
possible  from  all  impressions  and  is  seeking  such. 
The  lens  represents  the  concentration  of  the  mind 
upon  this  one  idea  or  purpose, — to  receive  guidance. 
The  shutter  represents  an  act  or  choice  by  which  we 
open  up  the  mind  to  receive  definite  suggestions, 
and  which  is  open  only  to  such  points  of  the  land- 
scape as  we  wish  to  have  impressed  upon  the  film. 
For  even  here  we  exercise  choice,  that  is,  we  choose 
along  what  line  we  shall  have  guidance.  The  land- 
scape represents  the  formation  of  the  idea  into  def- 
inite form  in  the  idea  plane,  that  is,  the  Divine  Mind. 
The  light  is  Spirit,  Wisdom,  Power.  Through  it 
alone  direction  comes.  It  is  the  substance  and  the 
source  of  all.  Light  is  Being  passing  into  form  or 
becoming  manifest '  * 


Intuition,  or  the  Higher  Wisdom       159 

This  is  the  use  of  the  intuitional  faculties.  We 
are  quiet  that  we  may  be  instructed.  To  be  sure, 
we  establish  the  image  of  desire;  but  it  is  simply 
that  Spirit  shall  give  us  wisdom  and  direction  along 
a  given  line.  We  do  not  wish  to  dictate ;  we  wish 
merely  to  know. 

So  if  you  see  no  way  out  of  your  present  diffi- 
culties, know  that  there  is  a  way,  and  that  Spirit 
as  Wisdom  knows  that  way.  Or  if  you  do  not 
know  how  a  thing  should  be  done,  nor  how  it  should 
appear,  yet  Spirit  as  the  Creative  Mind  or  Forma- 
tive Wisdom  does  know.  All  form  emerges  from 
it. 

Escaping  the  Lash  of  Experience. 

It  is  the  work  of  the  intuitions  to  find  out  for  us 
just  what  is  the  best  thing  to  be  done,  or  to  be 
chosen.  It  is  thus  that  we  are  kept  from  the  griev- 
ous errors  and  pains  of  wrong  thinking,  and  bad 
choices.1 

We  do  not  desire  to  be  always  in  the  chains  of 
our  mistakes,  or  to  be  ever  learning  through  bitter 
experience.  If  we  must  learn  all  there  is  to  know 
only  by  blindly  stumbling  forward,  and  through  bit- 
ter hardship  and  suffering  acquire  life's  lessons,  we 
are  doomed  to  a  life  of  hell,  for  the  possible  com- 
binations of  experiences  are  endless.  To  say,  then, 
that  life  is  merely  a  quest  of  experiences  and  that 


1See  pages   172-178  in  "Intuition   and   Ideation"   in    The   Law  of 
Mind  in  Action,  by  the  author. 


160  Being  and  Becoming 

we  are  here  to  learn  through  them,  is  to  say  that  the 
purpose  of  living  is  to  learn  what  not  to  do.  This 
is  as  false  as  the  Devil.  Life  is  eternal;  and,  if 
we  are  to  know  only  by  the  experience  of  broken 
law  how  to  avoid  error,  then  the  goblins  will  get  us 
in  the  form  of  Karma. 

But  we  must  realize  that  all  knowledge  already  is. 
What  we  are  to  do  is  to  learn  how  to  use  it  and  to 
bring  it  out  into  objective  manifestation.  Thus  do 
we  find  help  in  the  knowledge  of  the  personal  na- 
ture of  Spirit,  for  as  It  already  contains  within 
Itself  all  possible  and  potential  form,  It  will  select 
for  us  the  form  most  desirable,  if  we  will  advise 
with  it. 

Intuitive  Knowledge  in  Healing. 

In  the  case  of  healing,  all  we  have  to  do,  then, 
is  to  give  Spirit  an  opportunity  and  to  realize  that  it 
is  now  passing  through  into  manifestation  along  a 
given  line.  Let  us  take,  for  example,  the  treatment 
for  tuberculosis.  The  lung  has  been  manifesting 
partialness  of  idea  or  unwholesomeness.  What  we 
wish  to  do  is  to  make  it  manifest  wholesomeness. 
Having  taken  an  easy  position  so  that  you  are  at 
perfect  rest,  place  your  hand  on  the  body  just  over 
the  lung  and  say,  "Spirit  is  now  passing  through 
into  expression  as  a  perfect  lung.  The  word  is 
made  flesh  and  dwells  among  us.'  I  know  that 
there  is  within  me  the  spirit  of  wisdom  that  knows 
just  how  to  form  you  into  the  perfect  organ,  and 


Intuition,  or  the  Higher  Wisdom       161 

it  is  so  forming  you  now.  The  mind  in  me  that 
formed  you  in  the  first  place,  reforms  and  restores 
you  now  according  to  its  own  perfect  pattern." 
One  will  naturally  go  on  in  a  similar  vein  until  a 
great  consciousness  of  healing  rises  up  within 
him. 

This  method  is  not  dissimilar  to  the  so-called 
"new  method"  of  the  psychologist  who  talks  to  the 
cell-life  and  encourages  it.  That  is,  however,  direct 
"suggestion,"  conveying  the  impression  that  we 
must  "do"  something,  while  this  seeks  merely  to 
awaken  the  consciousness  to  the  fact  that  some- 
thing is  being  done  for  us,  but  which  would  not 
be  done  unless  we  called  the  healing  agent  into 
activity.  We  are  simply  to  realize  the  active  pres- 
ence of  spirit.  We  do  not  know  how  a  lung  looks, 
but  it,  as  the  formative  power,  does  know. 

What  we  must  seek  is  a  definite  feeling  of  whole- 
ness, and  after  some  practice  we  shall  find  that 
we  do  feel  the  life  forces  at  work  for  us.  This 
feeling  will  in  turn  react  upon  the  thought  to  give 
more  faith  and  courage. 

Now  what  has  really  happened?  In  the  first 
place,  we  must  recognize  that  we  are  dealing  with 
Mind  and  that  as  there  is  no  element  of  time  or 
space  in  Mind,  as  such,  it  manifests  with  all  Its 
Power  and  presence  wherever  it  is  recognized. 
Neither  psychology  nor  physiology  will  teach  us 
differently.  We  know  where  the  brain  is  located, 
but  not  the  mind.  Again,  even  though  thought  oc- 
7 


162  Being  and  Becoming 

casions  movement  in  the  brain  cell,  not  all  of 
"mind"  is  there.  We  therefore  center  mind  as  ac- 
tive by  realizing  it  as  present  in  any  part  of  the  body. 
Then,  as  active,  it  must  work  on  its  own  creative 
life  model.  As  Professor  James  has  told  us,  "All 
mental  states  are  followed  by  bodily  activity  of 
some  sort."  This  is  what  we  are  after,  to  feel  the 
presence  of  Mind.  Thus  our  mental  attitude  will 
be  followed  by  corresponding  activity  first  on  the 
emotional  plane  and  then  on  the  physical.  We  do 
not  get  out  of  the  body  to  heal  it,  but  rather  per- 
ceive Spirit  as  directly  active  in  it.  There  is  no 
need  to  deny  the  body.  On  the  other  hand,  we  are 
not  dealing  with  the  body  apart  from  Spirit — "apart 
from  me,  the  spiritual  self,  ye  can  do  nothing" — 
but  rather  with  the  body  as  spirit. 

Identity  with  Spirit. 

What  really  occurs  is  that  we  recognize  spirit  as 
such.  We  identify  our  body,  our  conditions,  and 
ourselves  with  Spirit.  THIS  IS  THE  MAR- 
RIAGE OF  BEING  AND  BECOMING.  This, 
then,  is  the  important  thing,  to  get  a  realization  of 
Spirit,  whatever  method  you  may  follow.  I  have 
secured  good  results  with  patients  who  have  used 
this  method ;  but  I  would  not  recommend  touching 
any  part  of  the  body  that  is  sore  or  swollen.  In 
that  case,  I  would  recommend  only  the  thought  of 
Spirit  as  active  there — Spirit  as  the  Perfect  Life 
working  out  its  own  pattern  of  lofty  perfection. 


Intuition,  or  the  Higher  Wisdom       163 

I  have  thus  illustrated  the  principle  of  the  use 
of  the  intuitive  powers  in  the  way  of  image- forma- 
tion. From  the  standpoint  of  guidance  in  affairs, 
and  such  things,  I  have  dealt  with  intuition  in  The 
Law  of  Mind  in  Action;  and  the  reader  who  is  inter- 
ested can  turn  to  those  pages  for  help.  Here  our 
object  is  rather  to  see  how  completely  our  mind  is 
at  one  with  the  Cosmic  on  every  plane,  and  how 
readily  we  may  identify  our  life  with  the  great  im- 
personal mind,  and  our  purpose  with  the  forward 
movement  of  Spirit.  It  is  in  this  perfect  harmony 
and  understanding  that  our  future  peace  and  happi- 
ness rest. 

There  are  a  thousand  ways  to  speak  but  only 
one  language — thought;  there  are  a  thousand  cen- 
ters of  individual  consciousness — but  only  one 
Source — Divine  Mind ;  there  are  a  thousand  forms 
but  only  one  Power — Spirit!  "Ask,  and  ye  shall 
receive ;  seek,  and  ye  shall  find ;  knock,  and  it  shall 
be  opened  ur.o  you."  And  for  him  who  would 
rise  in  the  scale  of  being,  who  would  intensify 
Spirit's  center  of  consciousness  in  him,  what  exer- 
cise more  replete  with  meaning  and  delight  than 
simply  to  count  over  the  sweet  promises  and  the 
loving  certainties  of  life,  to  dwell  on  the  joy  of 
real  living,  to  dream  over  the  wonders  of  a  world 
all  spirit,  to  see  God  in  stars  and  sunsets,  to  listen 
to  wee  wild  things;  and  then  in  the  silence  of  the 
soul  to  "be  still  and  know  that  I  am  God." 

The  proof  of  God  lies  not  in  nature  or  authority, 


164  Being  and  Becoming 

or  revelation;  it  lies  in  the  quiet  of  man's  soul, 
when  in  infinite  peace  and  calm  he  rests  upon  sur- 
passing love  and  is  satisfied.  "Thou  wilt  keep 
him  in  perfect  peace  whose  mind  is  stayed  in  Thee." 


CHAPTER  XXL 

DOES   DEATH   END   THE    PROCESS    BY 
WHICH  BEING  BECOMES? 

BECOMING  is  the  process  by  which  either 
God  or  man  expresses  being.  With  God, 
there  are  evidences  of  eternal  unfoldment 
and  self-manifestation.  Is  it  so  with  man?  For 
him,  is  death  inevitable?  Is  immortality  assured? 
Our  answer  to  these  questions  must  be  based  on 
the  law  of  personal  and  impersonal  mind.  While 
it  is  possible  that  revelations  have  come  to  us  from 
those  who  have  passed  through  the  portals  of  what 
we  call  death,  nevertheless  if  we  are  to  depend  upon 
these  for  proof  of  immortality,  the  majority  of 
mankind  would  have  to  rest  without  conviction,  be- 
cause in  the  nature  of  the  case,  only  a  few  could 
come  into  such  vital  touch  with  the  spirit  world  as 
to  get  the  proof.  Such  at  least  is  the  present  status 
in  the  study  of  psychic  phenomena.  It  is  probable 
that  it  will  be  many  years  at  least  before  the  aver- 
age person  can  have  these  proofs  presented  to  him 
personally,  if  at  all,  and  even  then  he  must  struggle 
with  the  problem  as  to  whether  the  voice  he  hears 

165 


166  Being  and  Becoming 

comes  from  "Beyond,"  or  only  out  of  his  own  sub- 
jective mind  or  by  the  creation  of  his  odic  forces. 
Yet,  within  this  science,  lie  all  the  proofs  that 
are  necessary  for  the  highest  conviction  and  faith. 
Let  us  review  the  facts.  If  I  can  know  anything 
at  all,  I  can  know  I  am.  If  I  can  know  I  am,  I 
can  know  that  I  think.  If  I  can  know  I  think,  I 
can  depend  upon  the  sanity  or  reasonableness  of  my 
thinking.  My  observation  and  reason  show  me  that 
I  live  in  a  living  universe,  visible  and  invisible,  and 
that  this  universe  is  made  of  Mind  and  by  Mind. 
I  can  also  perceive  evidences  both  of  a  personal  and 
an  impersonal  activity.  The  personal  activity  is 
the  choice  of  what  shall  be  made.  The  impersonal 
activity  is  the  creation  of  the  thing  that  has  been 
chosen.  These  facts  I  find  true  not  only  of  the 
universal  mind  but  also  of  my  own.  I  also  find 
that  since  the  universal  mind  is  by  its  nature  one, 
whatever  thinking  /  do  is  done  within  the  one  mind. 
Then,  since  the  impersonal  mind  must  create  in 
form  and  substance  whatever  is  given  to  it  as  a  pat- 
tern, it  must  create  on  the  pattern  /  give  to  it. 

The  Idea  of  Immortality  Impresses  Its 
Necessity  on  Creative  Mind. 

What  pattern  do  I  inevitably  give  it  regarding 
my  own  immortality?  Is  there  any  idea  of  which 
I  am  more  certain  than  my  determination  to  live 
forever?  Is  not  the  first  law  of  life,  the  preserva- 
tion of  the  self?    How  often  we  have  heard  it: 


Does  Death  End  the  Process?         167 

"Self-preservation  is  the  first  law  of  nature."  Do 
I  not  continuously  think  of  myself  as  an  individual 
entity  in  the  Cosmic  Mind  ?  There  are,  to  be  sure, 
those  who  are  like  the  New  York  schoolman  who 
said,  "I  do  not  want  to  live  forever ;  but  I  believe 
I  shall."  But  this  is  after  all  because  the  burden 
of  life  has  become  so  intolerable  that  some  would 
escape  from  it  altogether.  But  after  all  the  cry 
of  such  souls  is  for  freedom.  They  dread  life  be- 
cause they  are  bound.  Even  the  suicide  is  not  so 
much  trying  to  escape  life  as  he  is  making  his  pro- 
test against  being  limited.  He  believes  that  he  will 
secure  more  life  by  leaving  this  one.  That  he  must 
pay  the  penalty  of  his  rash  act  goes  without  say- 
ing; but  that  he  illustrates  the  primal  instinct  of 
human  life,  is  also  clear.  All,  all  demand  life,  free- 
dom, ^//-expression.  The  survival  of  the  self  is 
imperative.  I  have  never  known  any  one  who 
would  be  willing  to  exchange  his  self  with  any 
other.  He  may  have  a  desire  for  another's  cul- 
ture, education,  wealth,  opportunity,  and  so  on,  but 
never  that  other's  self.  He  feels  instinctively  that 
his  self  is  all  right ;  but  it  must  have  an  opportunity. 
The  idea  of  immortality  is  found  in  every  race, 
every  age,  every  individual  who  has  risen  to  any 
height  of  moral  attainment.  And  that  idea  is  thus 
persistently  held  in  the  cosmic,  creative,  impersonal 
mind,  which  must  construct  according  to  the  idea 
given  to  it.  Life  is  a  creative  fluid  and  makes  any- 
thing and  everything  given  it  to  make.     It  throws 


168  Being  and  Becoming 

all  its  resources  around  every  idea  and  will  con- 
tinue to  create  around  it  so  long  as  we  hold  the 
idea  within  the  depth  of  the  sea.  If,  then,  the  idea 
of  individual  identity  is  forever  instinctively  held 
in  mind,  it  will  forever  hold  us  as  individual  within 
the  bosom  of  its  greater  self.  We  are  immortals. 
No  Greek  or  Roman  god  ever  topped  the  earth  with 
such  colossal,  inherent,  and  glorious  power  as  moves 
and  beats  within  the  mind  and  heart  of  each  of  us. 
To  what  glorious  immortality  we  are  destined  by 
the  very  faith  within  us,  which  no  hardship,  no 
limitation  of  ignorance  or  despair  can  ever  down, 
the  immortal  faith  in  the  immortality  of  the  self. 
Said  that  great  Master  Teacher  who  understood 
these  principles  so  well,  speaking  to  Martha  of  the 
physical  death  of  her  brother,  Lazarus,  "I  [the  ego- 
self]  am  the  resurrection  and  the  life;  he  that  be- 
lieveth  on  me,  though  he  die,  yet  shall  he  live ;  and 
whosoever  liveth  and  believeth  on  me,  shall  never 
die." 

All  of  us  instinctively  believe  in  the  ego-self, 
and  therefore  all  shall  live  forever  in  individual 
freedom  of  the  self.  Said  Jesus  again  of  those 
who  are  reputed  dead,  "But  as  touching  the  resur- 
rection of  the  dead,  have  ye  not  read  that  which 
was  spoken  unto  you  by  God,  saying,  I  am  the 
God  of  Abraham  and  the  God  of  Isaac,  and  the 
God  of  Jacob.  God  is  not  the  God  of  the  dead 
bni  oi  the  living."    Thus  unto  God  all  are  alive ; 


Does  Death  End  the  Process?  169 

and  the  instinct  of  immortality  is  the  instinct  of 
God  Himself  in  our  own  soul. 

What  that  further  life  holds  for  us  we  shall  not 
inquire  in  detail  here.  One  or  two  things  we  may 
note  from  the  law.  It  is  foolish  to  suppose  that 
through  death  we  change  the  entire  thought-content 
of  the  mind,  that  bad  men  are  made  perfect,  and 
the  pious  at  once  enter  into  the  felicities  of  eternal 
indolence.  The  margin  between  the  best  of  us  and 
a  perfect  life  would  be  so  great  as  to  constitute  a 
total  loss  of  identity  if  the  chasm  were  to  be  crossed 
at  a  leap.  The  continuity  of  experience  demands 
that  we  go  on  in  even  development  "over  there." 
Thus  there  will  be  all  grades  of  society  and  of  in- 
terest. Again,  as  we  draw  around  us  those  who 
most  fit  the  thoughts  and  ideas  of  our  own  mind, 
we  shall  have  society  over  there  that  is  most  like 
ourselves.  We  shall  have  our  friends  and  prob- 
ably our  enemies.  We  shall  each  have  his  own 
work  to  perform.  But  the  beautiful  thing  about 
it  is  that  we  shall  all  go  on  in  unfoldment  and 
that  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  the  very  desires  of 
our  heart  will  draw  to  us  those  whom  we  love  and 
who  love  us. 

Death. 

Is  death  inevitable?  Must  all  die  in  order  to 
live  again?  Turning  once  again  to  the  law  of  im- 
personal mind  we  see  that  it  manifests  to  us  just 


170  Being  and  Becoming 

what  we  give  to  it  in  idea.  What  then  do  all  of 
us  give  as  an  idea  of  life  and  death?  We  give  the 
race-idea,  of  course.  It  is  the  experience  of  the 
ages  that  we  repeat.  Man  has  said,  "Whatever  is 
mortal  dies.  Man  is  mortal.  Therefore  man  dies." 
This  was  the  logic  which  the  sense-experience  gave 
and  to  which  the  sense-experience  has  assented. 
And  so  death  has  visited  the  race  from  the  begin- 
ning of  time  to  the  present.  Moreover  we  live  in 
a  world  wherein  form  is  in  constant  change  and 
transition,  and  is  a  part  of  the  .order  of  the  visible 
creation.  Man  is  therefore  impregnated  with  this 
idea  from  birth.     Can  it  be  changed? 

Whether  the  idea  of  physical  death  can  be 
changed,  depends  upon  what  we  mean  by  it.  If 
we  mean  the  idea  of  pain  and  wracked  physical 
senses  in  the  transition  of  life  from  one  plane  to 
another,  I  can  say  that  the  idea  is  changing.  Death 
is  no  longer  looked  upon  with  horror,  nor  is  the 
struggle  severe  with  advanced  souls. 

If,  however,  we  mean  that  man  will  eventually 
live  forever  on  this  plane,  I  do  not  believe  it.  I 
think  it  absurd  to  debate  it.  We  are  changeless  be- 
ings in  a  world  of  change.  This  plane  can  never 
hold  for  us  all  the  possibilities  of  self-expression 
which  is  the  purpose  of  life.  We  must  go  on.  But 
perhaps  we  shall  learn  how  to  transmute  the  body 
without  allowing  it  to  pass  through  the  ordinary 
stages  of  dissolution.  The  body  itself  is  uncon- 
scious life  or  mind,  that  is,  thought  which  is  vibra- 


Does  Death  End  the  Process?  171 

tion  and  has  been  organized  as  a  form  in  which 
to  house  the  soul.  Some  of  the  lofty  ones  of  earth 
like  Elijah,  Enoch,  and  Jesus  seem  to  have  known 
how  to  pass  the  unconscious  life-substance  back 
into  elemental  form  and  to  have  taken  on  a  spiritual 
body  without  leaving  the  physical  one  in  form. 
Whether  we  shall  all  reach  that  point  of  power,  I 
do  not  know.  One  thing  is  certain,  that  in  either 
case  the  body  is  entirely  changed ;  and  I  cannot  see 
that  it  matters  much  whether  we  leave  it  in  the 
air  as  oxygen,  hydrogen,  and  various  elements,  or 
whether  we  leave  it  in  the  ground.  In  either  case, 
it  is  the  death  of  the  form  and  not  of  the  soul. 

The  change  in  form  is  therefore  inevitable  and 
desirable  for  the  on-pushing  soul  in  the  quest  of 
great  adventures.  Nevertheless  it  should  not  be 
painful;  and,  in  the  majority  of  cases,  death  itself 
is  easy ;  and  the  pains  that  attend  it,  whether  men- 
tal or  physical,  are  as  nothing  compared  to  those 
experienced  by  the  same  persons  in  the  course  of 
the  disease  which  takes  them  away.  Death,  then, 
may  come  to  the  human  frame,  but  only  with  great 
peace  and  sweetness ;  and  in  days  to  come  we  shall 
see  preparations  made  accordingly,  and  instead  of 
the  palpitating  fear  and  agonized  desire  to-  keep 
the  reluctant  soul  one  day  more  on  earth  at  no  mat- 
ter what  cost  of  painful  medications,  we  shall  see 
the  beautiful  passing  of  the  spirit  into  other  fields 
of  love  and  self-expression.  Thus  the  death-bed 
will  become  the  scene  not  of  a  taking-off  but  a  tak- 


172  Being  and  Becoming 

ing-on;  and,  in  place  of  thinking  of  our  beloved 
as  passing  into  the  final  act  of  dissolution,  we  shall 
think  of  them  as  now  taking  the  primal  step  in  the 
re-birth  of  the  soul.  Before  our  very  eyes,  the 
beautiful  beginnings  of  life  are  being  effected.  Says 
Paul,  "Now  this  I  say,  brethren,  that  flesh  and  blood 
cannot  inherit  the  kingdom  of  God :  .  .  .  then  shall 
come  to  pass  the  saying  that  is  written,  Death  is 
swallowed  up  in  victory.  O  grave,  where  is  thy 
victory?    O  death,  where  is  thy  sting ?" 


"I  Am  He"  175 

hope  and  the  eternal  peace  of  man,  for  love  can 
.  never  deny  itself,  and  as  the  object  of  an  eternal 
and  supreme  affection,  man  stands  at  the  apex  of 
the  spheres,  king  not  by  power  nor  by  might  but 
crowned  by  the  chaplet  of  Divine  Love. 

Spirit  as  All. 

Thus,  in  the  ultimate,  we  come  to  the  one  great 
need  of  human  thought,  the  distinct  necessity  of 
recognizing  Spirit  as  All,  from  Alpha  to  Omega. 
It  is  being  passing  into  expression  in  becoming,  just 
as  the  light  of  the  stereopticon  is  the  same  from 
one  end  to  the  other.  And  our  age  demands  a  real- 
ization of  this  one  fact  above  all  else — that  Spirit 
is  all,  in  all,  and  through  all. 

God  is  Spirit  or  Life,  and  in  Him  we  live,  move, 
and  have  our  being.  And  we  must  learn  to  make 
our  identity  with  Him.  Not  to  lose  identity  in 
Him,  which  is  Nirvana,  not  to  be  less  ourself  but 
more  ourself,  this  is  what  we  seek.  We  are  points 
of  intensified  consciousness  and  expression  in  Spirit. 
We  are  Being  manifested  in  becoming;  but  being 
and  becoming  in  the  ultimate  are  one.  The  need 
of  this  age  therefore  is  not  merely  a  message  but 
also  a  messenger ;  let  the  messenger  be  the  message. 
We  need  not  so  much  the  teaching  of  truth  as  its 
manifestation  in  human  form.  We  must  see  the 
Word  bodied  forth  in  flesh.  This  is  the  secret  of 
Jesus,  "Glorify  thy  Son,  that  Thy  Son  may  glorify 
Thee:  even  as  Thou  gavest  him  authority  over  all 


176  Being  and  Becoming 

flesh  .  .  .  And  this  is  life  eternal  that  they  should 
Know  Thee,  the  only  true  God,  and  him  whom  thou 
didst  send,  even  Jesus  Christ.  I  glorified  thee  on 
the  earth,  having  accomplished  the  work  thou  hast 
given  me  to  do.  And  now,  Father,  glorify  Thou  me 
with  the  glory  I  had  with  Thee  before  the  world 
was.  I  manifested  thy  name."  Jesus  thus  iden- 
tified his  being  with  that  of  the  Eternal  Creative 
Spirit ;  and  he  rightfully  claimed  that  in  his  person 
this  Spirit  was  manifested.  In  him  being  had  its 
perfect  becoming. 

"I  Am  He." 

Our  age  demands  the  same  glorious  manifesta- 
tion of  the  sons  of  God.  Of  us,  Jesus  himself  tes- 
tified, "I  say  ye  are  gods."  The  only  God  that 
men  shall  ever  see  is  the  God  in  and  through  men 
and  a  manifested  creation.  "This  is  the  secret  hid- 
den from  the  foundation  of  the  world,  Christ  in 
you,  the  hope  of  glory."  Each  of  us  in  greater  or 
lesser  degree  is  a  manifestation  of  Spirit;  and  I 
do  not  wonder  Peter  could  exclaim  in  the  presence 
of  Jesus,  "My  Lord  and  my  God."  I,  too,  looking 
into  the  face  of  a  godlike  man  or  woman  and  see- 
ing in  such  an  one  God  manifest,  could  exclaim 
without  shame,  to  .the  God  within  and  manifest, 
"My  Lord  and  my  God." 

We  hear  many  voices  to-day  declaring  the  way  to 
truth  and  life.  Let  us  follow  our  teaching  by  em- 
bodying it. 


"I  Am  He" 


177 


"For  none  of  the  singers  ever  yet 
Has  wholly  lived  his  minstrelsy, 

Or  lived  and  sung  that  life  and  song. 
Might  each  express  the  other's  all, 
Careless  if  art  or  life  were  long, 
Since  both  were  one  to  stand  or  fall. 

So  that  the  wonder  struck  the  crowd, 
Who  shouted  it  about  the  land, 
His  song  was  only  living  aloud, 
His  work  a  singing  with  his  hand. 


Let  or  allow  the  new  Messianic  figure  to  appear 
in  you.  "Some  great  cause,  God's  new  Messiah!" 
The  cause  is  that  of  God's  own  divine  self-expres- 
sion in  humanity;  let  us  be  the  expression.  When 
we  speak,  let  men  say  of  us,  "I  believe  that  man, 
for  he  is  one  hundred  per  cent  expression  on  every 
plane — spirit,  mind,  and  body.  He  Is  what  he  talks 
about."  Jesus  was,  and  exclaimed,  "I  am  he." 
Let  the  new  Messiah  also  appear  exclaiming,  "I 
am  he."  "I  am"  is  the  absolute  of  being.  "I  am 
he"  is  the  process  of  becoming.  Then  when  being 
and  becoming  have  found  perfect  union,  the  mystic 
marriage  has  taken  place;  and  God  has  accom- 
plished Himself  in  us.  Already  there  are  men  and 
women  on  the  planet  who  have  found  the  divine 
union;  and  the  day  dawns  when  they  shall  step 
forth  saying,  "I  am  he  that  should  come."  And 
the  way  for  this  to  be  universally  realized  is  to 


Gi 


178  Being  and  Becoming 

recognize  that  "it  is  not  I  that  speak,  but  the  Father 
dwelling  in  me,  He  doeth  the  works."  Thus  to 
recognize  that  which  already  Is,  is  to  cause  it  to 
be  so  manifested.  Being  and  becoming  are  then 
one. 


The  End. 


L6A. 


'■•